JP7191369B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. (For example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the jackpot game, when a series of games in which a plurality of jackpot games are executed in a short period of time occurs, how much prize balls were obtained during the series of games. There is a game machine that produces an effect indicating As a result, the sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the big win is heightened by the game presentation, and the interest in the game is heightened by grasping the amount of prize balls obtained in the big win game.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In the gaming machine as described above, although the amount of winning balls obtained by the big win game is indicated, it is difficult to grasp whether the amount of winning is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a possibility that the game will be distrusted and the interest in the game will be lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in interest in a game while indicating the amount of game profit obtained.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game executing means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the total amount of game profit obtained when the game state is in a specific state advantageous to the player;
a specific profit display unit displayed when the total amount of gaming profit obtained in the specific state reaches a specific amount,
Having a first game effect as the game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
When the total amount of game profits obtained during execution of the special game reaches the specified amount, the specified profit display portion is displayed, and the specified character and the specified amount of game profit are displayed on the specified profit display portion. information is displayed and
both the profit information display portion and the specific profit display portion are displayed;
The specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for a specific period while maintaining the display of information indicating the specific character and the specific amount of gaming profit,
The profit information display unit updates the display of the profit information when a game profit is obtained even while the specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for the specific period. is.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decline in interest in the game while indicating the amount of game profit obtained.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a ready-to-win determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. A pattern selection table. It is a table|surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of the process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special design 1 decision processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flow chart of special design 2 decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flow chart of a special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. It is a table|surface which shows the design kind of the performance design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production|presentation design game production|presentation of the state A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production|presentation design game production|presentation of the state B. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in production mode C, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in production mode D. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production|presentation design game production|presentation of production|presentation mode C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production|presentation design game production|presentation of production|presentation mode D. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit variation in the production mode D, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a small hit game in the production mode D. It is a flowchart of small hit look-ahead effect processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of effects when a specific period starts; It is a figure which shows an example of the mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen from before to after the start of the mode selection period during the jackpot game. (a) is a table showing types of second effect patterns (battle effect patterns of effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing types of third effect patterns (battle effect patterns of effect mode D). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display example of a preview image in effect mode D; 4 is a display pattern determination table for a preview image; It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the production|presentation design game production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display content of a first specific effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display content of a first specific effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display content of a second specific effect; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of a second specific effect B; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the 2nd specific production|presentation C. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first notice effect (effect pending notice), and (b) is a effect pending notice decision table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display content of a third notice effect (fireworks notice). FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of a fourth notice effect (chance zone notice). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of a fifth notice effect (full-rotation notice) and a full-rotation effect; It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of specific reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of specific reach production|presentation. It is a table|surface which shows an example of an advance notice production. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of an advance notice production. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of an acquired profit display effect|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of an acquired profit display effect|presentation. It is a figure which shows the transition mode of a game state and a jackpot game. It is the table|surface which shows the game production|presentation in each production|presentation mode. It is a figure which shows the execution aspect of each production mode. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of confrontation ready-to-win. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another execution mode of the earned profit display effect;

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following description, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed following the end of the variable display of the symbols, a pachinko machine capable of executing a winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profits (for example, prize balls) to the player will be described. , an example to which the present invention is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is used for playing games. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 , 56 . In addition, the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side in the vertical direction (the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Also, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also simply referred to as "effect button 63") is provided. A plurality of production buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game production. Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or input detection means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are positioned in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. and is slanted in the outward direction. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 described later, can display images according to the execution/non-execution of a game, the state of the game, the performance of the game to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information on games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability/explanation of game production, etc.) , information (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) relating to the settings of the gaming machine is displayed. Among these information, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information. Further, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these information, the same information is displayed. There are cases where Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may be displayed. Any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

The image display device 7 is provided inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2 , and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided outside the game area 3 . ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-opening side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is Therefore, it is possible to rotate in the horizontal direction around the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, from the state (normal state) shown in FIG. 1, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to project forward of the front frame 51 is used for pachinko. This is a configuration for preventing damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball dispenser, inter-stand equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the game machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. Also, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a production pattern display area 7b (also called a production pattern display section) in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "production patterns") are displayed side by side. ) is provided, and the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are the game state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state) according to the game state A variable display is performed in synchronism with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol to be described later) set as the subject of the game. The production pattern 8L is also called "left pattern", the production pattern 8C is also called "middle pattern", and the production pattern 8R is also called "right pattern".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). Although details will be described later, in this low-probability-low base state, the frequency of entry of game balls to the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and the propriety of special symbols Judgment probability (first special symbol suitability judgment and second special symbol suitability judgment) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol (more than 2 times) is set (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, rather than launching a game ball into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entering the second start hole 21 to variably display the second special symbol, the left game area 3A (second game area) 1 game area) to enter the first start hole 20 and display the first special symbol in a variable manner is more advantageous for the player. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a game state in which the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main subject and is variably displayed. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are synchronously displayed with the first special symbols and are displayed in a variable manner and stopped.

Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. A first special symbol display device 41a ("first The result of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit ”), and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display unit 41b (also referred to as the ``second special symbol display unit'') The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the special symbol propriety determination is also simply referred to as "property determination" or "first propriety determination". In addition, the control section (main control section 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same 3-digit symbol (double number) such as "777" (also known as "big hit symbol" say). In addition, in the event of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance pattern such as ``135'' or a special pattern for a small hit such as ``3*3'' (also referred to as a ``small hit pattern'') will be used. Stop displaying the pattern. In addition, when a small win is achieved, the pattern may be stopped and displayed in the same manner as the small win pattern and the winning pattern instead of the mode of stopping and displaying the small win dedicated pattern. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern, etc.) can be distinguished. ) may be stop-displayed, or the same (common) small winning pattern may be stop-displayed so as to make it difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is lost, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed with a different symbol. ”). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of special symbol suitability determination) by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped. In addition, as the mode of the variable display of the production pattern, for example, a mode of scrolling up and down, left and right, oblique direction, etc., a mode of showing the production using only the first production design display part 7b, and a mode of displaying the production using only the first production design display part 7b In addition, it has a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a and the third effect symbol display portion 72a. Moreover, in addition to this, it is also possible to have a mode in which an effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display portion 71a or the third effect symbol display portion 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), it is executed along with the winning game (big win game, small winning game). A winning game effect (a big winning game effect, a small winning game effect), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like are displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is shot to the left game area 3A and a game is played, or a game ball is shot to the right game area 3B Depending on whether or not a game is being played, the display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game Machines are also called "simultaneous variators (parallel variators)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display section) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later, There is a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display section) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect suspension 9a or the second effect suspension 9b in the effect suspension display area, the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later The number of memories and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect pending display portion and the display position of the second effect pending display portion may change depending on the game state, game mode, or game effect to be executed (ready effect, etc.). Further, only one of the first effect pending display portion and the second effect pending display portion (for example, only the effect pending display portion corresponding to the main special symbol) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. ), the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. This enhances the player's interest in the game and heightens the expectation of winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol ( 1st special symbol right/wrong judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and the first special symbol is stop-displayed based on the result of the right/wrong judgment after a predetermined time elapses.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (a normal figure start opening, a passage opening, a ball entry opening, a specific start (also called mouth) is provided. A game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. This gate 28 also serves as a starting gate 29 (also referred to as a winning combination gate or an operating gate) for starting a big win game. In other words, this gate is the gate 28 and also the start gate 29 . When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for judging whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, normal Symbol suitability determination (also referred to as ``second suitability determination'') is executed, normal symbols start to be variably displayed, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol suitability determination after a predetermined time elapses. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 . In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination whether the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 or not as the "validity determination execution means" It is also referred to as "second right/wrong determination execution means". This gate sensor 28a also serves as a starting gate sensor 29a for starting a big win game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

In addition, although the details will be described later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed through, the function of the start gate 29 is exhibited only when the conditions for executing the big win game are satisfied (big win execution). It is also called a possible state or a jackpot waiting state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) while the condition (big win standby state) is not established, the control processing relating to the normal pattern is performed, and the big win start processing is not executed. In addition, when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28), the jackpot game in waiting starts, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game is started in which the first big winning hole 30 is in an open state (a state where a ball can be entered).

In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big prize opening 30 is provided. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 , and opens and closes the first big prize opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) game ball passage on the upper surface. It is passable. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first big winning hole 30 passes through the top surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning hole 30. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3, thereby forming a game ball passage on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. disappears. As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first big winning hole 30 enters the first big winning hole 30 . In this way, the opening/closing member 32 for opening/closing the entrance of the first big prize hole 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down can be smoothly moved to the first big prize winning opening. In addition to letting the ball enter the winning opening 30, it is possible to guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (at the time of closing) in an arbitrary direction (second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance) is configured to open and close the opening and closing member 32 so that a game ball cannot enter a ball entering state (closed state) and a game ball entering a ball entering state (closed state). It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third start port 26, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the second special symbol ( Second special symbol right/wrong judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the right/wrong judgment. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), the upper game ball path in which the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower game ball passage in which a second prize winning port 35 is provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage comes into contact with the game nail 16 provided near the third starting hole 26 and enters the third starting hole 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. - 特許庁In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed type winning device that can always enter a ball, when a big hit is achieved in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big-hit game is executed in a right-handed game. , it is possible to enter (hold) the game ball into the third starting port 26 during the big win game, and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big win game ends.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is a variable A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as "variable starter" or "variable starter") having a second starter 21 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (the 2 special symbol right/wrong determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after the elapse of a predetermined time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the right/wrong determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening/closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, the movable member 23, like the opening and closing member 32, has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) upper surface as a game ball passage. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. - 特許庁Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 thus removed disappears from the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 . As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21 . In this way, the movable member 23 for opening and closing the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are removed. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and when the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is moved in an arbitrary direction (second big winning port 35 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to

In addition, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the second start opening 21, a second big winning opening 35 is provided. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member 37 which opens and closes the second big prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a game ball passage with a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) top surface. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37 . Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opened/closed member 37 disappears from the entrance portion of the second prize winning port 35 . As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second big winning hole 35 enters the second big winning hole 35 . In this way, the opening/closing member 37 for opening/closing the entrance of the second big winning hole 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when it is open), the game balls that flow down is smoothly entered into the second big winning hole 35, and when the closed state (at the time of closing), the game balls flowing down are guided in an arbitrary direction (out hole 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance) operates by opening and closing the opening/closing member 37 to provide a non-enterable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entering state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In addition, a plurality of (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In the pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking left. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game centered on entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed hitting (first special symbol propriety determination).

On the other hand, if it becomes a big hit in the success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entering the first start port 20, the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) after the end (low probability high base state or high probability Low base state) is a game aiming to enter the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30, the second starting hole 21, or the second big winning hole 35 by hitting to the right. That is, the jackpot game, and the low-probability base state (state B) or high-probability low base state (state C) is mainly based on entering the second start port 21 by hitting to the right (second special symbol propriety determination) This is a right-handed game. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, and the general ball entering hole 27, each ball entering hole , a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” or “gaming profits”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the first big winning hole 30 (amount of game profit) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big prize winning port 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big prize winning port 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. prize balls shall be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right portion of the game board 2 . The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably display and stop display normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a win indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination is a hit, and the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, hitting right. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be shot left or right. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. - 特許庁The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 . In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the first start port 20 or the second start port is displayed according to the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed (derived display). The result of the success/failure determination (special symbol success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on the entry of the ball into 21 is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), the opening pattern according to the type of the specific special pattern stopped and displayed, A special game (big win game, small win game) for opening the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The pattern of opening the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the first jackpot (4R first jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are turned off. Also, when the second big win (4R second big win) is achieved, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Moreover, when it becomes out, two LED of "lo" can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off. Also, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. As for the stop display mode, similar to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined according to the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, small hit, or miss). In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed (before derived display), the special symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined variable time. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows through.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of the variable display) of the special symbols and the performance symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a win (big win or small win) is called a "hit mode." ", "specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out is the "loss mode" or "non-specific mode". , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit is also called a "big hit mode", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a small hit is called a "small hit". It is also called "matching mode". Furthermore, the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display portion), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and any one or all of the special symbol display portion 41 Also referred to as "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information ("acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if it is information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, If it is information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 85b as a second special figure suspension (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to judge the special symbol suitability determination random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball to the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, each special During the execution of the variable display of symbols or during the execution of a special game based on any special symbol suitability determination, the right to determine the special symbol suitability for that ball is reserved (reserved), with a predetermined number (4 for each) as the upper limit. ).

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as "u□v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is extinguished, such as "u●v□". In addition, when the number of reservations is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed based on passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). notify. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stopped and displayed normal pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (hit normal pattern), an auxiliary game ("specific game") to open the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state ) is performed. In addition, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also called auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination according to the lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the win normal symbol with both LEDs lit up is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ▪: lights up, □: lights out). In addition, when the determination result is out, a non-normal symbol in which only the LED of t is lit is displayed, such as "s□t■". Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is performed over a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately repeat turning on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various types of information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as random numbers for judging normal symbol suitability based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reservation in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 . An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game , can reserve (hold) the right of the normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of this normal map reservation is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . Concretely, the normal map reservation indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal diagram reservations. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (“main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, etc.) that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, and game state transition. Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit" or "production control unit") that performs control related to the performance to be executed with the progress of the game, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a production pattern 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a pattern displayed on the production display device 102, a third production reservation display device 103a, and an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling the display of the fourth effect holding display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above this main control board case, An audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board storage case containing the image control board 100 are provided. is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and general figure reservation storage unit 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, and A general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a normal symbol display. A figure hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47, and a winning indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls or rental balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching device 112 through a launching control board 111 (also referred to as a "shooting control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 1), and a prepaid card (game card) inserted by the player performing a predetermined ball lending operation. It enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be put out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes the shooting handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling game effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. there is The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90, based on the command received from the main control board 80, to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 , the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b let it take control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, graphics, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs variable display and stop display according to the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs variable display of the second special symbol. And display mode that shows the display result of the first special design or the second special design (result of special design propriety determination) by performing variable display and stop display according to the stop display, and lighting / extinguishing of the corresponding LED, or color Stop with . Similarly, the third effect suspension display 103a and the fourth effect suspension display 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on/off the two LEDs, or by combining colors, the third effect pending display device 103a is displayed by the pending number displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c and the first special figure pending display device 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number. In addition, the fourth effect pending display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. be.

The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion). part), part or all of the production pattern 8, the first production suspension display part 9c, or the second production suspension display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even when such a covered state occurs, the effect display device 102, the third effect reservation display device 103a, And the 4th production|presentation suspension display 103b is provided. In addition, the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b are in a state in which visibility is not hindered by the movement of the movable decorative member 14, etc., and is always visible. It's becoming A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the one-chip microcomputer 101 for image control of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 . In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5. , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . 1, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and determines. The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the movement pattern data obtained. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the special symbol suitability determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol propriety determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". At the time of "big hit", the special symbol display part 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". Further, in the case of a "small win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays the "small win symbol". In addition, when "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped special symbol. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specification result) of the special symbol suitability determination, the type of hit corresponding to the result (specification result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol suitability determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc., different hit types (jackpot , including small hits). Also, depending on the winning type, the special game to be executed may differ, and the game profit amount obtainable by the special game may differ, or the game state after the special game may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R th jackpot". There are 5 jackpots, 2R 6th jackpots, 2R 7th jackpots, and 2R 8th jackpots. In the "15R 3rd jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is 15 times. In addition, the "4R 1st big win", "4R 2nd big win", and "4R 4th big win" have four openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30). "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot", the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30) is Twice. In this way, in the big hit, the first big prize winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also called a "big winning big winning hole (big winning variable ball entrance)".

Also, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" will be described later. Transition to a high probability state (activate the probability variable function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variable jackpots (high-probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability variable function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" shift the game state after the jackpot game to a low-probability state described later (variable probability function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also called "low-probability jackpots (low-probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot" are "2nd special pattern time saving" that sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special pattern to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. function" and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-low base state (state C). This high-probability-low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the game characteristics of the high-probability-low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various ball entrances are arranged, the second special It is a period during which a symbol success/failure determination is performed, a small win is generated, and the number of game balls can be increased during the period between the previous big win and the next big win (between big wins). In addition, by frequently generating small wins in the high probability/low base state between big wins, it is expected that many game balls can be obtained in a short period of time due to the small wins. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and a period in which it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the "4R 2nd big win", "2R 7th big win" and "2R 8th big win" operate the "2nd special symbol short working hours function" and "high base generating function" after the big win games are finished. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low-probability-high base state ends when the next jackpot occurs or when the variable display of special symbols is executed 100 times. . When ending based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the game state is set to the low-probability-low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of the "2R 7th big win", the low-probability base state ends when the next big win occurs or when the special symbols are varied and displayed 50 times. When ending based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is executed 50 times, the game state is set to the low-probability-low base state (normal state). In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in the low probability height base state, as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged, the second special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, the "2R 5th big win" and "2R 6th big win" activate the "second special symbol short working hours function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the big win game. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-high base state. In the case of the "2R fifth big hit", the "second special pattern time saving function" continues until the next big hit occurs, and the "high base generating function" continues until the next big hit occurs or the special pattern fluctuates. Terminate based on 50 display runs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability variation function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of the "2R 5th big win", after the big win game is over, the high-probability/high-base state is maintained until the special symbol variation display passes 50 times, and the big win does not occur even after 50 times. , The game state is set to a high-probability-low base state.

In the high-probability-high base state, similarly to the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-probability-low base state is an advantageous period for the player who can expect to acquire many game balls in a short period of time by frequent small hits due to the right-handed game. be. It should be noted that there are more game balls obtainable in the high-probability-low base state than game balls obtainable in the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, when a big win does not occur until the number of times of variable display of special symbols after the end of the big win game passes 50 times, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state).

In addition, the "2R 6th big win" is in a high-probability/high-base state until 100 times of fluctuation display of the special symbols after the end of the big win game, and if no big win occurs even after 100 times, It is the same as the "2R 5th big win" except that the game state is set to the high-probability-low base state, that is, the period during which the game state changes is different. In addition, the "2R 5th big win" is set earlier than the "2R 6th big win" when the game state changes from the high-probability-high base state to the high-probability-low base state. Therefore, it can be said that the "2R fifth big win" is more advantageous for the player than the "2R sixth big win".

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game) related to the "2R fifth jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R seventh jackpot game) related to the "2R seventh jackpot" By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, ready-to-win performance, etc.) in the high base state and the high base state, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. Thereby, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the game state becomes a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player) after 50 times of variation display of special symbols, and "2R In the case of "seventh jackpot", the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of fluctuation display of special symbols, so the player is not notified. In any state, the game is played in anticipation of transition to the high-probability-low base state, thereby increasing the amusement of the game.

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game related to the "2R sixth jackpot" (2R sixth jackpot game) and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game related to the "2R eighth jackpot" (2R eighth jackpot game) By executing a common game performance (second game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, ready-to-win performance, etc.) in the high base state and the high base state, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. Thereby, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

When the type of the jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", after 100 times of special symbol variation display, the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player), and "2R In the case of the eighth jackpot, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of fluctuation display of the special symbols. In any game state, the game is played in anticipation of transition to the high-probability-low base state, thereby increasing the amusement of the game.

In addition, the high probability high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game) related to the “2R fifth jackpot” and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R seventh jackpot game) related to the “2R seventh jackpot” A certain high base state, a high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R sixth big win) related to the "2R sixth big win", and a big win game related to the "2R eighth big win" (2R eighth big win game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-probability-high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these game states are set to a non-notification state (made difficult to recognize) in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified.

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the game state becomes a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player) after 50 times of variation display of special symbols, and "2R In the case of "seventh jackpot", the game state changes to a low probability/low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of display of fluctuation of special symbols. Further, when the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state (advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of variation display of special symbols. In the case of the "2R 8th jackpot", the game state changes to a low probability/low base state (a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of special symbols. Therefore, in the non-notification state, the player expects to shift to the high-probability-low base state when the variable display of the special symbols has passed 50 times, regardless of the game state. , it will increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if it does not shift to the high probability low base state, at least the high base state continues without shifting to the low probability low base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) The game I do. When the non-reporting state continues after 50 times of the variable display of the special symbols, a big win is expected, and when the 100 times of the variable display of the special symbols is passed, the state shifts to a high-probability-low base state. The game is played in anticipation of the fact that the game will be played, and the amusement of the game is heightened. In this way, in the non-notification state, the points that increase the player's expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further increase the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hit that can occur as a result of the second special symbol success/failure determination, the number of openings of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and compared with other big hits, the number of opening times is 1 (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, six openings of 0.3 seconds are performed for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small winning game is set to be less than that of the big winning game (for example, 15R third big winning game, 4R fourth big winning game, etc.). However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (many times), a small hit game can be executed a plurality of times, and more game balls can be obtained. Further, in the case of a small hit, all the second big winning openings 35 are opened and the first big winning openings 30 are not opened. For this reason, the second big winning hole 35 is also referred to as "big winning hole for small winning (variable ball entry hole for small winning)". In addition, unlike the big win (big win game), in the small win (small win game), the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings. Further, the variable probability function does not operate based on the occurrence of the small win, and if the game state at the time of the occurrence of the small win is a high probability state, the high probability state is maintained even after the small win game ends, and when the small win occurs. If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is maintained even after the end of the small winning game. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

In addition, the allocation probability to each big hit in the success/failure determination of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hits in the judgment of the second special pattern (special figure 2) are 50% for the 15R third big hit, 5% for the 4R fourth big hit, 5% for the 2R fifth big hit, and 5% for the 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, by the operation of the later-described second special symbol time-saving function, when the hit or miss determination (second special symbol success or failure determination) based on the ball entered into the second starting port 21 with improved variation frequency, 15R A big win (15R third big win) is achieved, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is entered into the first start port 20 and the game is played at the second start port 21 rather than becoming a big hit in the success determination (first special symbol success determination). It is set so that the possibility of winning a big hit in the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) performed when the ball enters the ball is advantageous to the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained). there is In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R third big win and the occurrence of a high probability/low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, whether a big win, a small win, or a loss is determined based on "random number for judging special symbol success/failure (also called "information for judging success/failure")". The determination of the type of the jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" and "information for symbol determination"). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the special symbol suitability determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes, in addition to the random number for judging the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type, "variation pattern random numbers (also called “fluctuation pattern information”)”. Also, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-198. Random numbers obtained based on passing through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol suitability determination). The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1, each function of a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and normal symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and normal symbols, and an open extension function for the second start port is activated or deactivated. It has a plurality of game states depending on the combination of states. The state in which the probability variation function is operating for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "low probability state". In the high-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being judged as a big-hit in the special symbol suitability judgment is higher than in the low-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to perform the hit/fail determination. The table is used to determine whether or not the item is correct (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability that the variation display of the special symbols will result in a big win (a stopped symbol becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated. Incidentally, the means (main control section) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of special symbol suitability determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry into the starting port (an entry that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, as shown in FIG. there is When the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, when the state A shown in FIG. As the symbol suitability determination is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes for loss, 3 minutes for big win, 2 minutes for small win), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state is also referred to as "first condition state"). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in state A, it is difficult for the player to obtain a large number of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even when the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake in the state A, the game ball is entered into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the end of the variative display of the second special symbol. , it is possible to variably display the first special symbol.

When the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state B or state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (maintain or slightly decrease in state B, state C While increasing in), it is possible to smoothly execute the game (second special symbol propriety determination, second special symbol variation game). In addition, in the present embodiment, while the second special symbol time-saving function is operating, the first special symbol time-saving function is also operated, but the first special symbol time-saving function may not be operated.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for normal symbols are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of normal symbols operate in a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and a low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base condition). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol suitability determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "normal high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined as a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variable display of the normal symbols will result in a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than in the low base state. In the present embodiment 1, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state and 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Concretely, when the result of the normal symbol suitability determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and opens. The second starting port is open during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol wins in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Also, the closing time between opening motions in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening/closing member 37 is made different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the low base state opening may be performed once for 2.7 seconds, and the high base state may be performed three times for 2.0 seconds. Also, the opening operation in the high base state may be 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which is larger than the number of openings in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 for normal symbols are operated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not operated. , the period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol suitability determination increases. In addition, as described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

Also, if the opening time is the same, the possibility of the game ball passing through the second starting port 21 can be reduced when the number of times of opening is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to 6.0 seconds once open, and the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal pattern fluctuation, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 during the normal pattern fluctuation time. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before it passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is placed on the front side of the game ball. It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the game ball flowing speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the speed of the game rapid flow in the game ball passage on the near side. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made loose, or an obstruction member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow rate may be provided. Also, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second big winning opening 35 is in an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start opening 21 and enters the second opening. It is difficult to enter the ball into the big winning hole 35. - 特許庁

A high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are active. That is, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time reduction function, and the operation of at least one of the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second start port than when the function is not in operation 21 should be easily released (high frequency of ball entry). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1, it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether the second special symbol is appropriate than when determining whether the first special symbol is appropriate. There is a possibility of trying to variably display the second special symbol without variably displaying it. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state), the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (average variation time) , even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not in play (non-playing state)" means that the first special symbol is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending first special symbols is "0 ”. In addition, "the state in which the second special symbol is not in play (non-game state)" means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending second special symbols is "0". It means that

In addition, in the high base state such as the high certainty high base state and the low certainty high base state, and the high certainty low base state, the second special symbol time saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, right-handed game The game efficiency is improved by In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously by playing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol propriety determination which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting hole 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting hole 21 than into the first starting hole 20. This is because Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁

In addition, in the high probability and low base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as the low probability and low base state (normal state), but it is executed based on the entering ball to the second starting port 21 Since the variation time of the second special symbol to be played is changed in a short time, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol right/wrong determination more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol right/wrong determination can be executed. In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for normal symbols are not operating, so the entry to the second start port 21 The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead of this, the second special symbol success/failure determination prevents the game balls from decreasing during the big hit by a small win (small win probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes frequent small wins. It is also possible to increase the possession ball by (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high-base state (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state), the ball is frequently entered into the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. 2 Aim to generate the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls based on the entry into the second starting hole 21 is set to 1, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting hole 21, the game There is no ball increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, it is set so that about 90 to 95% of right-handed game balls enter the second start hole 21, so unless a ball enters another ball hole, high base If the condition is continued for a long time, it is designed to reduce the holding ball slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, the right-handed game generates a small hit at high frequency by the second special symbol success/failure determination based on the ball entering the second start port 21, thereby increasing the number of possession balls in the small winning game. While trying to increase, aim at the occurrence of the next big hit by the second special symbol propriety determination. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high-probability-low base state, the longer the period during which the next big win does not occur (the longer the period of the high-probability-low base state continues), the more small wins are generated. Opportunities for (executing a small winning game) increase, which is advantageous to the player.

[Description of board structure and game state]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various ball entrances, from the upstream side of the game area, a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big winning opening 30, a The second starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls (90% above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32 of the first grand prize opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then flows down the upper surface of the second starting opening. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and then to the out opening 34 . Then, if there is a winning opening in the open state in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and enters the game area downstream. It has a bad structure.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) when the normal symbol reservation becomes "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream of the right game area, almost all right-handed game balls can pass through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are open. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When the right hitting game is performed in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination whether the second start port 21 is opened is executed be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning normal symbols is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21 . That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol suitability determination is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second start port 21, the second 2 starting port 21 will be in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second start port 21 is also one time of 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second start port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (1 second closed → 6 0 seconds open→1 second closed→approximately 6.0 seconds open→...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played in a high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B go to the second starting port 21. The ball will be entered. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed. In the second special symbol right/wrong determination, in the high-probability/high-base state, there is a probability of 1/63 for a big hit, a probability of 30/63 for a small hit, and a probability of 32/63 for a miss.

First, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is out, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28, and most (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls are in the open state. The ball enters the second starting port 21, and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second starting port 21, and do not flow down to the second starting port 21, and the third starting port. 26 or flows into the out port 34. Thereby, the second special symbol propriety determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed without almost reducing the number of balls held, aiming for the next big hit. becomes possible. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is discharged.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big win, the first big winning hole 30 on the upstream side of the second starting hole 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big win type shown in FIG. . Also, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big winning game. As a result, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball flowing down due to the game hitting to the right smoothly enters the first big winning hole without being hindered by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21.例文帳に追加Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big win game, but in the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is activated even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the state is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the jackpot game enters the second starting port 21 first and does not enter the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加A situation occurs in which only the game ball enters the second big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加

Moreover, since only one prize ball is entered into the second starting port 21, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily lengthened, and there is no merit for the player. Rather, the game becomes redundant and does not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the jackpot game can be smoothly progressed. Become. Since the first big winning hole 30 is not opened except during the big winning game, the first big winning hole 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting hole 21 when the big winning game is not in progress. No.

Next, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the opening/closing mode for a small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, six 0.3 second opening motions are performed (0.1 second closing time between opening motions). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is open most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls that flow down to the second starting hole 21 enter the second starting hole 21 arranged upstream of the second big winning hole 35 . Therefore, in the high base state, a small win is achieved, and even when a small win game is executed in which the second large prize winning port 35 is opened, the second large prize winning on the downstream side is controlled by the second starting port 21 on the upstream side. The entry of the ball into the opening 35 is blocked, and the entry of the ball into the second big winning opening 35 is difficult. In addition, although the number is small (although the possibility is low), even in the high base state, when the second start port 21 is in the closed state, there are game balls that pass the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second start port 21. When reaching the second big winning hole 35, if the second big winning hole 35 is in an open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35. - 特許庁

Next, the high-probability-low base state will be described. The high-probability-low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-probability-low base state, first, the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened (normal symbol validity determination) is executed. In the low base state (high probability low base state), the normal pattern fluctuation time is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the normal pattern per probability is about half of the high base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 opens. becomes. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, hits and misses occur about half and half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol suitability determination is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second start port 21, and then the second The starting port 21 will be in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also 0.9 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 , It is closed during the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds after that, and when it is lost, it becomes the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds again. In an example in which hits and misses occur alternately, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opened three times for 0.9 seconds, and the normal pattern for 3 seconds. It will be closed during the variable time, it will be out, and it will be closed during the normal pattern variable time of 3 seconds, and the cycle will be repeated (3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 2.7 seconds open→3 seconds closed→3 seconds closed→approximately 2.7 seconds open→...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played in a high probability low base state, the period in which the second start port 21 is in an open state is about 30%, and the period in which it is in a closed state is about 70%. . Therefore, in the high-probability low base state, the period in which the second starting port 21 is open is about 90%, and the period in which it is closed is about 10%. A game ball flowing down to the entrance of the opening 21 is highly likely to reach the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting opening 21.例文帳に追加. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol right or wrong judgment will be a small hit is the same whether it is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) or high probability low base state. No. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination performed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination performed in the right-handed game has a small hit. ing.

As described above, in the high-probability-low base state, about 70% of the game balls that flow down the right game area (flowed down to the second start port 21) enter the second start port 21. It flows down to the second big prize winning port 35 provided downstream of the second starting port 21 without any movement. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second start opening 21 is opened in the opening/closing mode for a small hit shown in FIG. state. Specifically, six 0.3 second opening motions are performed (0.1 second closing time between opening motions, 1.8 seconds total opening time). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in an open state, the When the ball enters the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in a closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35 to play a small winning game. The ball enters the second big winning hole 35 in the open state by .

The prize balls based on the entry into the second big prize opening 35 are made to enter the second big prize prize opening 35 during the small winning game because ten prize balls are made for one entering ball. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high-probability-low base state. In addition, the high probability low base state continues until the next big hit occurs by at least the special symbol propriety determination (only the second special symbol propriety determination is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued), so the high probability low base state continues for a longer period of time, the player can increase the number of possession balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire about 20 prize balls (two winning balls) on average by occurrence of one small winning game. By generating this small winning game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big winning occurs, it is also possible to increase a large amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times). In addition, as the total winning balls of the ``continuous period'' in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the big winning game and the winning balls of the small winning game can be added, and a larger amount of game balls can be acquired. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30 for big wins (dedicated to big wins) and the second big winning hole 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of them) than the second starting hole 21 are for small wins ( It is considered to be a big prize mouth for small hits only). In addition, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for a small win, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening 35 to be opened. The number (proportion) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, the opening and closing control of the second starting port 21 (time to be open, normal symbol fluctuation time, normal symbol success/failure determination hit probability), when a small hit game is executed, a high base state ( The possibility of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is higher in the high-probability-low base state than in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of the opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, as a result, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second start port 21 to substantially maintain the possession ball (including a slight increase or slight decrease) (or suppress the speed of the possession ball decrease) while), a state (high base state) in which the game is played in anticipation that the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big win), and a game ball is entered into the second start port 21 and a small game is played. A state in which a game is played in anticipation of a big win (advantageous big win) as a result of the second special symbol winning judgment while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning hole 35 when a win occurs (high probability, low probability) base state), and diversify the playability. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. For the player, the high-probability/low-base state in which the number of held balls can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high-probability-high base state, in the high-probability-high base state, a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) of special symbol fluctuations When the big hit is not achieved until the display ends, the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state in the performance symbol display part or the like. A game effect is executed in a display mode. Thereby, even if the game state after the end of the jackpot game is not the high-probability-low base state but the high-probability-low base state, it is changed to the high-probability-low base state after the predetermined number of fluctuations. It is possible to play games with anticipation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the amusement of the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th big win" and "2R 6th big win" as the types of big wins that shift from the high-probability-high base state to the high-probability-low base state. "2R 5th big hit" shifts from a high-probability high base state to a high-probability low base state after 50 times of special pattern fluctuation display, and "2R 6th big hit" is 100 times of special pattern fluctuation display. After passing, it moves from the high probability high base state to the high probability low base state. In addition, as high-probability-low base states, there are "2R 7th big win" and "2R 8th big win". "2R 7th big hit" transitions from low probability high base state to low probability low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and "2R 8th big hit" is 100 times special After passing the variable display of the pattern, it shifts from the low probability high base state to the low probability low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, there are four jackpot types, namely, "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot". Executing the common presentation in the base state makes it difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. That is, it is set to a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of these "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit", which are in the non-notification state, is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after 100 times have passed, there is a higher possibility than when the high base state ends at 50 times. It is assumed that As a result, the player expects to transition to the high-probability-low base state after 50 times, and if the high-probability-low base state continues after 50 times ( Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase expectations for the high-probability-low base state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time.

It should be noted that, instead of changing to such an aspect, even if the possibility of moving to the high-probability-low base state is set to be the same even when the transition is made when 50 times have elapsed or when the transition is made when 100 times have elapsed Alternatively, conversely, the possibility of transitioning to the high-probability-low base state may be higher in the case of transitioning after 50 passes than in the case of transitioning after 100 passes. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high probability low base state is reduced. In addition, another type of jackpot is provided, and if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is greater than the first predetermined number of times, ( If no big win is achieved by then, it may be decided to shift to a high-probability-low base state. Conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol variations have been displayed, after the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of (if not), it may be determined not to transition to the high-probability-low base state. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is established in the middle of the non-notification state of the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and letters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (executing a fixed effect). status may be reported.

Also, in the high probability low base state, if the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, and if it is out, the result of the second special symbol propriety determination in the above-mentioned high base state It is the same as the case of a big hit and the case of a loss.

In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B by also serving as the gate 28 . As a result, in the case of a big win standby state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being blocked from passing through the start gate 29 by the second start port 21 or the like, and the big win game is started. It becomes possible to The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is required to be provided upstream from the starting port 21 and the second big prize winning port 35. - 特許庁

Further, when the right-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the right-handed game area. In addition, when the left-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled (display-controlled) in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the ball should be shot to the left-handed game area. Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, effect pattern) is performed is "low-probability-low base state", "high-probability-low base state", " It is possible to control either "low probability high base state" and "high probability high base state", but among them, the low probability low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high probability low base state It is also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter settings. Reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Initialization (S101) is executed only once after power-on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the normal design is "general pattern", the special design is "special design", the first special design is "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is "special design". 2” or “second special figure”.

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90 or the payout control board 110 etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, second big winning hole sensor 35a, general ball entrance sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read and stored in the output buffer of RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Then, a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts). As a result, randomness is imparted to the acquired values of various random numbers.

After the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described start opening sensor detection process (S204), start ball time process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), special figure 1 operation process (S207) ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), number of pending balls processing (S209), and power off monitoring processing (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (about 4 msec later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal design reservation balls (the number of normal design reservations, specifically the number of normal design reservations provided in the RAM) value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

In S302, when it is determined that the number of normal design reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored (S303), and normal symbol random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information, general pattern acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls out of the general pattern reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a (S305). At S305, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO at S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, in S305, when it is determined that the game ball entered the first start port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically the main control unit 80 It is determined whether the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservation provided in the RAM has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, in S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. In S306, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Perform processing (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7(A)), Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls out of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S309). At S309, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO at S309), the process is finished. On the other hand, in S309, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. In S310, if it is determined that the number of special 2 pending balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), add "1" to the number of stored special 2 pending balls (S311), special 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), similar to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7 (A) random value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls out of the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball entry process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start entrance sensor detection process (S204) and then the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the gaming ball entering the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (acquired information) is read ( S316). Next, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the obtained random numbers read out, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (special symbol success/failure determination random number) is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big win is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) by this S317 is a prejudgment (so-called "reservation look-ahead ”).

In addition, the prior determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot determination table for a high probability state, if it is a normal state (low probability state) For example, based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of determination by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol success/failure determination matches the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random number for special symbol success/failure determination matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start ball command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not sent as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) obtained based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be sent.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether it is information related to the big hit, the type of the big hit, or information related to the small hit The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Also, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur when the determination is made in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored in .

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S316 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Random number for type determination), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination Generate command data as a special figure 2 start ball command, can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319) in the same manner as in the processing relating to special figure 2 described above. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S319, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S321), Pre-judgment is performed for the obtained random number value read out (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). It should be noted that the prior determination of S322 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process described later.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14, following the start ball entering process (S205). In the general pattern operation processing (S206), the processing related to the normal pattern display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "General pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), normal pattern fluctuation process (S404) is performed, and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), normal pattern confirmed When the process (S406) is performed and the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, S405 are all NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal design waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that it is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0" in S501 (NO in S501), the normal symbol validity determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the game state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern in which the normal symbol variation time is 3 seconds is selected. Also, following the normal design variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal design random number shift process described later is performed (S504), then the normal design variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In normal design fluctuation start processing (S505), normal design fluctuation display is started in the normal design fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
Next, the normal symbol suitability determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON, that is, the high base state (YES in S602), the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the value "0" to "238"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol suitability determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in the low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) Based on the table for (hit determination value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) determines whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
Next, normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the general pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the process during normal design fluctuation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not passed (NO in S801) processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), set the normal pattern fluctuation stop command (S802), set the normal pattern operation status to "3" (S803), and then display the normal pattern fluctuation, Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hitting normal symbol or losing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol propriety determination is performed (S804), and the process is finished.

[Normal design confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the normal pattern per flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the per normal pattern flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). In S902, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second start port open counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening for state A and state C (for low base state) as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) Set a pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (for low base state) is, as described above, a release pattern in which 0.9 seconds is released three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port open counter. In S904, the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003). If so (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control to open the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. Also, in S1002, if it is determined that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after opening the second start port 21, (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), processing is performed to close the second starting port 21 (S1006), and the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, if it is determined that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), end processing per normal pattern to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal pattern is set ( S1010), and finish the process. It should be noted that the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during the state B (high base state). Also during the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, in S1001, if it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. , Turns off the normal pattern per end flag (S1011), turns off the normal pattern per flag (S1012), sets the normal pattern operation status to "1" (S1013), and ends the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) next to normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. FIG. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. And, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105 ), special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "4" (S1101, S1103, S1105 both NO, S1107 YES), special electric as a big hit game Accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), the process ends. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination, the special electric auditors processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. You may In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) of the first starting port 20 is "0" (S1201). In S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0", that is, there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not special figure 2 is in play (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in play (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in play (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be the standby screen (demonstration screen for customer waiting is being executed) It is determined whether or not (S1208), and if it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing ends.

Also, in S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in play" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" means that Of course, it means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
Next, the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203), first, as the determination value, stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (ie the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol propriety judgment random number counter (the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is a big hit, it is not determined whether it is a big hit or not. It is regarded as one of the outliers (that is, it is never judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination executed during that time is Everything is out. In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the variation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then the probability variation flag is ON or not, i.e. It is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for normal state (for low probability state) out of the jackpot determination table (Fig. 8 (A)) Based on the table (big hit determination values are "3" and "397"), determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S1603), the winning determination is performed based on the high-probability state jackpot determination table (S1605). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", and "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined as a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label -TRND- (S1608), determines the jackpot pattern based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1609), Turn ON the big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. Also, if it is determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol (special figure 2) hit/fail determination, 15R 3rd big hit, 4R 4th big hit, 2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit, 2R Any one of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the design is determined to be out (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the jackpot change flag, the first jackpot change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing the change display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. and a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and a main control unit 80 A corresponding flag is set in the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to a small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed). A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the big hit variation flag is set for one of the special symbols (that is, when the variation display related to the big hit is being performed), the process of determining whether or not the other special symbol is a big hit is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed such that both of the special symbols execute the variable display relating to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and to moderately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) next to the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203). As shown in Figures 24 and 25, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) first determines whether the gaming state is state A (whether it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, in S1701, if it is determined that it is in state A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON If determined (YES in S1702), referring to the state A jackpot table (the part corresponding to the state A and jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected according to the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of pending balls (number of pending) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). In S1705, if it is determined that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number deviation table (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1, 2) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Also, in S1705, if it is determined that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number deviation table (Fig. 9) of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which corresponds to state A and out and the number of reservations 3 and 4), and selects a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In Example 1, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

Also, in S1701, if it is determined that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that it is in state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), referring to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to the state B and the jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), variation based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In S1709, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (part corresponding to state B and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Also, in S1708, if the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9 A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. In S1712, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (part corresponding to state C and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since it is a game state in which the game is mainly performed by the variation display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first Variable display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the variation time of the first special symbols in the state B and the state C is simplified (the number of types is small and the variation time is short). In the state B, a variation pattern P15 is used in the case of a big hit, and a variation pattern P16 is used in the case of a loss. In the state C, the variation pattern P23 is used in the case of a big hit, and the variation pattern P24 is used in the case of a loss.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processes shown in FIG. 24 are executed (S1704), and the process ends. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003" , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored) RAM corresponding to the fourth second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1803) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has passed It is determined whether or not (S1901). In S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 has not passed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 variation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process is finished. On the other hand, in S1901, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of variations of the special symbols executed during state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the state B counter value is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state (normal state), and if it is a high probability high base state, it shifts to a high probability low base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped with the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol propriety judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number Others such as (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) is during fluctuation display of special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1, and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big win game or the small win game is finished. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success/failure determination process and the variable display related to the other special symbol are not executed.

Special Figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then special It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2909). At S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO at S2909), the process is terminated. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, in S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn ON the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time (S2904), and finish the process. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Also, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON is determined (S2905). At S2905, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES at S2905), it is determined that the big hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON in S2905 (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is judged that the small hit game relating to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in S2906, if it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), resumes the measurement of Toku-zu 1 fluctuation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of variable time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol It has a special figure 2 suspension flag (also referred to as a "second suspension flag") that indicates that the variable display is being suspended, and a flag corresponding to the suspension flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display according to the first special symbol is being turned OFF (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special design is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the variation display relating to the big win is ended (the big win is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big win game.

In S2004, the value of a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. Also, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbols to be variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. In addition, thereby, it will be in a jackpot standby state. Also, in S2001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, because it is a variation display related to the deviation, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the jackpot flag, the result of the hit/fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. flag”), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called “second big hit flag”) indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a big win and the big win game related to the big win is being executed. , and when a big-hit game is executed, a big-hit flag corresponding to the big-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a small hit and that the small hit game related to the small hit is in progress ), and when a small-hit game is executed, a small-hit flag corresponding to a small-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a lamp for 2R, a lamp for 4R, and a lamp for 15R, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first jackpot is won, a display mode such as "2RΔ4R▴15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights on, Δ: lights off) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) etc. will be described. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing ( S206) etc. are processed in the same flow, so the following description will be simplified.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) is processed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 operation processing (S208) next to special figure 1 operation processing (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is capable of performing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special figure 1 operation processing and special figure 2 operation processing. That is, digestion of the first special symbol reservation and digestion of the second special symbol reservation (“variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol”, “first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol ) can be executed in parallel. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entering the second starting port is the success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entering the first starting port. Judgment), the player is more likely to win a large profit (large amount of profit that can be obtained) (FIG. 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, like the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. Divided, and assigned "special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" to each stage. And, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155 ), special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric power as a big hit game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109) is performed. In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108) is common processing between the special figure 1 operation processing (S206) and the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), and the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) Special Figure 2 operation processing (S211) only processing. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is capable of simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. This is because the jackpot game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the jackpot game, both the small winning game related to the first special symbol and the small winning game related to the second special symbol are made non-executable in parallel (only one of them is executable).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 waiting process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 waiting process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation is omitted.

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
The special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, in the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) Read out the stored random number counter value for special symbol suitability determination (label-TRND-A). In addition, since it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol propriety determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small hit design is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processing is the same as the special figure 1 propriety determination processing (S1203).

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) to select a variation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Moreover, in the state B and the state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is right or wrong). Therefore, in state B and state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and it is possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability determination). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and a relatively long time variation pattern can be selected. Therefore, in state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (there are few types and the time is short).

After selecting the variation pattern in this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), other processes (S1404) are performed and this process ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1503) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation process]
The special symbol 2 fluctuating process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes the jackpot type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, but it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process, which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2102, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. . After the special pattern is determined and stopped as a big win pattern and the big win is achieved, the game ball is passed through the start gate to turn on the big win start flag and progress the big win game (a round game is started). Here, when the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the big win, the gaming machine is maintained in the big win standby state in which the big win can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, or a phone call. After the break, the player shoots the game ball at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the big win game. Also, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game has been completely opened (the jackpot game has ended).

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), whether it is time (round start time) to open the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30), that is, whether it is time to start the first round by passing the start gate 29. Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2105, when it is determined that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the big winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first big winning hole 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the kind of big win.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not the time has come to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30), that is, the big winning hole It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed since the opening of the door (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been entered (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is established, processing for closing the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending period is set. is started (S2117), the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is finished. Also, in S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2119, when it is determined that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting processing described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , The big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), S2154 Go to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to the low probability state and the low base state, before the start of the jackpot game (round game), the probability variation flag and the state B flag are turned OFF.

Also, if it is determined in S2152 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning OFF the variable probability flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning OFF the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that it has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), start the jackpot game (open the round game). The jackpot start flag is turned ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine is continued in the jackpot standby state. Also, in S2151, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process is finished. As a result, the player can start (progress) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game ended this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, the 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as probability variable jackpots. corresponds to any one of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the variable probability big hit has ended this time (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is judged whether the finished big win game is the 2R fifth big win (S2203). . In S2203, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R fifth jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is started. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 50 times of high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), it is then determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (S2209). At S2209, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R sixth jackpot (YES at S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 100 times of the high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. In S2209, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, the 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, or 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned OFF. Finish the process. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability-low base state.

In S2201, if it is determined that the finished jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot, that is, a low-probability jackpot (low-probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then whether the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot is determined (S2206). At S2206, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R seventh jackpot (YES at S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, a maximum of 100 times of high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a low probability high base state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2206 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the 4R second jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state "50" is set in the B counter (S2205), and the process ends. As a result, a high base state is set up to 50 times at maximum after the end of the jackpot game, and a low probability high base state is established.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is a special symbol. 1 (YES in S3001), turn off the special figure 1 big hit flag (S3002), set the special figure 1 operation status to "1" (S3003), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all ended in the small winning game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the time has come to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small winning has passed. Then, it is determined whether it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . As for the small-hit game, the small-hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small-hit symbol regardless of passage through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big win game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide the start time of the small win.

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the big winning slot (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning hole (YES in S2303), the second big winning hole 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304) and processed. finish. When it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation six times, that is, six times. It is determined whether or not the total number of all game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). In S2306, if it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation has reached the prescribed number (10) (YES in S2306), the big winning hole (second big winning The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the opening counter for the small win is changed. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). In S2310, when it is determined that the value of the opening counter for small hits is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is finished as it is in order to start the next opening operation.

On the other hand, in S2310, when it is determined that the value of the open counter for the small hit is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set (S2311), a small-hit ending period is started (S2312), a small-hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. It should be noted that the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, in S2301, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a specified number of game balls have entered), so It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and when it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2315), the process is finished. On the other hand, in S2315, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small win game in the high-probability-low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big win while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time If it is determined that is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed Finish. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 ), turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Processing of pending pitches]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) next to the special figure 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is finished.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As explained in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the unique effects not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or the comparison with the conventional pachinko gaming machine and have a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first identification information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second identification information") is stopped in a jackpot pattern (also referred to as a "specific display mode")), a high probability state occurs (a privilege is granted), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high probability state ( benefits) shall be terminated.

The processing (game state setting processing (S2121)) for providing this high probability state (privilege) can also be called "privilege providing means". In addition, the first special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and stop display are performed, and the same result of judgment is shown. , ``Stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) with the jackpot symbol'' can be replaced with ``Stop display of the performance symbol with the winning performance symbol (specific display mode)''. .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control section 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control section). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes a sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, at S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, even in the effect control microcomputer 91, the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, the data related to the effect control at the time of power failure such as power failure is backed up. For this reason, when the power is turned on after recovery from a power failure such as a power failure (at the time of power failure recovery), unless the initialization of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4003) is performed, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 The state of returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 . The random number for determining the effect includes the random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for determining the previous notice effect that determines the previous notice effect, and the random number for determining the effect pattern that determines the effect pattern. There are random numbers, etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. It should be noted that when updating the random number, the random number may be incremented by 2 instead of being incremented by 1. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 .

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100, sound control board 106 and lamp control. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the corresponding control board, which is the command transmission destination. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various production devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to produce various productions. (Production pattern game production, special game production related to winning game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 In addition, it is possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91 is checked. Judge (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub control board 90. FIG. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, based on detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d, an input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for illuminating lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5, and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and driving data are created by 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303). Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401) , If it is determined that the process of S4403 has been received (YES in S4401), effect pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process of S4403 is performed. Effect pending information storage processing (S4402), various information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination random Numbers, game information such as fluctuation pattern random numbers), depending on the type of special design (1st special design, 2nd special design) and the number of special design pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the start ball command (at the time of command generation) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 out of the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this way is used for execution of various effects such as a variable effect, an advance notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub control board 90 can also be said to be "obtained information storage means".

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), variation production start processing ( S4404) is performed, the process proceeds to S4405, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation production start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is judged that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the production design is stopped and displayed to change production. A fluctuation performance end process to end is performed (S4406). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4406), the production pattern 8 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 which has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A stop display is made and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is terminated. On the other hand, in S4405, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable production refers to various productions performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a winning game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). ), the round start command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize winning opening in the round game This includes the first big winning slot entry command transmitted based on the ball entering 30, the second big winning slot entering ball command transmitted based on the ball entering the second big winning slot in the small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small win game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command designating an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot identified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command A round effect command specifying a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on is set in the sub-output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending specifying an ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the performance command to the sub-output buffer. Also, if the received command is a large winning slot entry command (first large winning slot entry command, second large winning slot entry command), a large winning slot specified based on the command (first large winning slot) A ball-entering effect command designating a ball-entering effect corresponding to the ball entering the hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) is set in the sub-output buffer. When various production commands related to these set winning games are transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the progress of the winning game to the opening production and round. Performance, ball-entering performance, etc. are executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal design variation start command and normal design variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the variable effect start processing (S4402), first, random number processing for effect determination (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as variable effect determination random numbers, advance notice effect determination random numbers, and effect symbol determination random numbers is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing of receiving the variation start command from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the performance symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the variation pattern specification command includes variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. The results and pattern information specifying the type of jackpot are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether (variation display of the production pattern) is related to the special figure 1 or related to the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can be used in processes other than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Then, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current rendering mode.

Here, the production mode is a mode of production mainly by the image display device 7, and if the production mode is different, part or all of the production mode of the game production such as the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production will be different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.), or the characters, items, and background images that appear. considered different. In addition, the effect pattern game effect can also be executed in a manner according to the effect mode, and when multiple game effects (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. can be In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low probability and low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high probability and low base state, production mode E is executed when it is controlled to the low probability-high base state and when it is controlled to the high probability-high base state. Therefore, when the performance mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the performance mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-low base state or the high-probability-low base state. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player confirms the production mode, it is difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. be. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. are used, and the sub-control unit 90 mainly controls the pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern, effect pattern (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the variable production pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice production determination table are set. . That is, it has a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and from these, a predetermined variable performance pattern determination table and a predetermined notice performance determination table are set based on the game state (performance mode) and the like. do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a notice performance determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect pattern, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (not shown) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among those fluctuation production pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the variable production determination random number obtained in S4501 and the fluctuation production pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variation production pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it ( S4505). As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing a reach production (reach with production pattern game production), or when executing a character production using a specific character (character production pattern game production), reach production and character A case where the production is not executed (reach non-production symbol game production) or the like is determined. In addition, the ready-to-win effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol propriety determination indicates that the result is a big hit, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double). In the case where a different mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stop display (temporary stop display) with the patterns (same production patterns) constituting the big hit mode ), and in a state in which the remaining one continues to be variablely displayed (scrolled), whether or not the remaining one performance symbol is stopped and displayed in a pattern (three same performance symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a production that shows At this time, along with the variable display of the performance symbols, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character, and whether the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode is determined, and whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of Such a game effect (a ready-to-win effect and a character effect, which will be described later) can also be referred to as a story effect (specific game effect) or a purpose effect (specific game effect). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the big win and heighten the amusement of the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. The performance symbol 8 stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance is out of the result of the special symbol propriety judgment, and in the case of reach presence or failure, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the production patterns is a loose eye that is different from the other production patterns, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said to be a barakeme with different production patterns

Also, in S4506, the notice effect to be executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a performance symbol game performance including the notice performance to be executed. This advance notice effect indicates the possibility that the result of the effect pattern game effect being executed will be stopped in a big hit mode, before the effect pattern is displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect pattern). notification performance). In S4506, based on the notice effect determination random number obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, a notice effect suitable for the designated variation pattern and the determined change effect pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), end the fluctuation effect start processing. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 outputs the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in 1 is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variable effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Overview of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the production symbol game production (fluctuation production) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variable effect pattern etc. set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the production pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbols 8, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured.

The variable display of the production pattern 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order) ( vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" again and repeats the vertical scrolling. The aspect of the variable display of such performance symbols 8 is determined by the variable performance pattern stored in the above-described variable performance pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various types of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling), switching display in which patterns (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling, and the like. It is possible to provide a mode as a variable production pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the aspect of the variable display depending on the production mode and the game state.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbols 8 is performed according to the variable time determined by the variable pattern of the special symbols, and the variable display is stopped as the variable time elapses. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stopping mode, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stopping order") of each of the performance symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol” (also referred to as “first stop mode”); (also referred to as a "second stop mode"), and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as a "third stop mode") in which the stop times (stop timings) of all symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). and (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the left and right symbols are stopped at approximately the same time and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the variable effect pattern selected (set) at S4505 determines which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection/decision (setting) of the variable effect pattern also serves as the selection/decision (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection/decision (setting) of the variable effect pattern and the selection/decision (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The first stop symbol is also called "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol is also called "second stop symbol", and the third stop symbol is called "second stop symbol". This is also referred to as "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in production mode C (state C), and the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is “small”. It is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the performance symbols 8 is performed based on the fact that the game is "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), mainly in (1) production modes A and B (state A), the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is "off" or "jackpot". When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on that, (2) in the production mode E (state B), the result of the second special design propriety determination is "off" or "big hit". Based on the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C, In the case of D (state C), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being "off" or "jackpot", This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly in (1) production modes A and B (state A), under circumstances where the function of shortening variation according to the number of special pending balls works (at the start of variation When the number of special figures 1 reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol propriety judgment is "out", and based on this, the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed by normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed with normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special pattern right/wrong judgment being "miss" or "minor hit". In the case, (3) in production modes C, D (state C), when the fluctuation display of the production pattern 8 is performed by normal fluctuation based on the fact that the result of the second special design propriety judgment is "out", and (4) in the production mode D (state C), when the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is "small hit", the variable display It is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stop.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), mainly when the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is "off" or "big hit". It is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the performance pattern 8 are provided according to the performance mode (game state) and the variable display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol propriety determination. Thus, it is possible to diversify the stopping mode by varying it according to the game situation. Also, the player can guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect pattern 8 to be displayed (derived display) after that by paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped. It is also possible to guess the type of special game that can be executed, the presence or absence of execution, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the above-described first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol→left symbol→middle symbol" ), and a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the left and middle symbols are stopped at approximately the same time and then the right symbol is stopped. The conditions under which the aspects are executed are not limited to the present embodiment, either, and can be set in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the patterns "1" to "9" constituting the production pattern 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of pattern (design type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (performance mode). Specifically, in state A (production modes A and B), "7" among the odd patterns is a red pattern (hereinafter also referred to as "red pattern"), and the other odd patterns "1" and "3". , “5” and “9” are green patterns (hereinafter also referred to as “green patterns”), and even number patterns “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are blue patterns (hereinafter “blue patterns”). (Also called "pattern"). On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D and E), among the odd patterns, "3", "5" and "7" are red patterns, and the other odd patterns are "1" and "9". are green symbols, and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols.

Note that the correspondence between patterns and colors according to this embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondences can be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to this embodiment either. , other colors can be used. In this embodiment, the pattern types (red pattern, green pattern, blue pattern) are determined by color, but they can be determined by factors other than color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the production design, and the number design when there is a production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design (number design) representing a number The symbol type may be determined by the character design, or the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd-numbered design and the even-numbered design.

The variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed, and the combination (stop display mode) of the production patterns 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above, The result of the variable display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic pattern combination (stopped display mode), the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different patterns (numbers), and the production pattern is a "perfectly separated pattern" (such as "124"). 8L (left pattern) and the production pattern 8R (right pattern) are the same pattern (number), and the remaining production pattern 8C (middle pattern) is a different pattern (number) from the others "Reach Barakeme" ("343" etc.) ) is defined as an out mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of a winning game. On the other hand, "double eyes" ("777" etc.) in which the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same are used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). there is

On the premise of such a basic pattern combination, in the present embodiment, the "reach loose pattern" among the loose patterns is also used for the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) than the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of the state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls (increase in holding balls) in a small winning game compared to the low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (amount of profit). In addition, the "completely loose eye" among the loose eyes is also used as a small winning mode that triggers the execution of the small winning game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is open most of the time, so the small winning big winning port (the second opening) located downstream of the second starting port 21 This is because it is difficult to enter the ball into the big winning hole 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit from a small hit is extremely low (extremely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to missing). Furthermore, the "specific loose eye" to be described later among the loose eye is a small winning mode that triggers the execution of the small winning game (small winning of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-probability-low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific loose eyes) is also referred to as "first display mode", the big hit mode (double eyes) is also referred to as "second display mode", and the off mode (complete loose eyes, reach rose) The order of the order of the order) is also referred to as the "third display mode", and the complete order of the detachment mode (completely isolated order, the extended order) is also referred to as the "fourth display mode".

In addition, since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, mainly the first special symbol validity judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed. Since it is rare that the second special symbol validity judgment (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol validity judgment is performed under such circumstances. When it is performed, it is assumed that only the variable display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed without performing the variable display of the corresponding effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. there is Similarly, state B (high base state) and state C (high probability low base state) are game states based on playing right-handed games, so mainly the second special symbol judgment (second special Since it is rare that the first special symbol validity judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol, such a situation When the first special symbol propriety determination is performed below, the variable display of the corresponding production pattern 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display by the production display 102 ( and stop display). However, if a special symbol right or wrong judgment is made against the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and the judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol right or wrong judgment is made When the game is played and a big win is achieved), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 displays a performance display suggesting the occurrence of the big win. conduct. As a result, while the effect display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variable display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is performed in parallel with the variable display of the main special symbol. It is possible to let the player know that the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be played is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big win, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big win, thereby missing an opportunity to obtain a profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability-low base state) will be described. The game production performed in the state A is mainly a production symbol game production (variation production) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. As described above, in state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed under the condition that the background image (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting and transition of the production mode in the state A are automatically performed according to the predetermined mode control conditions under the control of the sub-controller 90 (the production control microcomputer 91). . Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the presentation mode in the state A.

In the state A, the production patterns 8 are blue patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8", and green patterns "1", "3", "5", and "8". A "9" symbol and a "7" symbol consisting of a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). These patterns are displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading image data (design data) of the corresponding design from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. executed.

Under these effect modes and symbol types, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54(a)), the variable display is basically in the second stop mode. (Left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern) is stopped (see FIG. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), shortening variation according to the number of special figures 1 pending balls When the function works (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54(g)). Here, when the left pattern (production pattern 8L) and the right pattern (production pattern 8R) stop at the same pattern, reach is established (see FIG. 54(f)), and then the middle pattern (production pattern 8C) is displayed in a variable display. A ready-to-win effect is executed on an image display device or the like until the game is stopped. In the ready-to-win performance, mainly, a performance indicating whether or not the medium pattern (final stop pattern) stops with the same pattern as the previously stopped pattern (whether or not a big hit mode is displayed) is developed. Regarding this ready-to-win state and the ready-to-win effect, the states B and C are the same.

While the performance pattern 8 is displayed in this manner, if the performance pattern 8 is displayed in a loose pattern (completely loose pattern or reach loose pattern) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the big win mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big win game becomes executable, and when the big win game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is switched to a jackpot game performance for a 4R jackpot related to the first special symbol. Then, when the big win game is related to the "4R first big win", the game state after the big win game is completed becomes the state C (high probability low base state), and the game related to the "4R second big win". , the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes state B (low probability high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production in state B]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (low probability-high base state or high probability-high base state) will be described. Incidentally, the high-probability-high base state is set after the big-hit game based on the "2R 5th big win" or "2R 6th big win" occurs in state C (high-probability low base state).

The game production performed in the state B is mainly a production symbol game production (variation production) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. As described above, in state B, "E" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed under the condition that the background image (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-controller 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

In the state B, the effect patterns 8 are blue patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8", green patterns "1" and "9", and red patterns. Symbols "3", "5" and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). These patterns are displayed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading image data (design data) of the corresponding design from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect pattern 8 is different between the state A and the state B. FIG.

Under these effect modes and symbol types, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55(a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode. (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55(b)). In the state B, since the second special pattern time saving function and the high base generation function are operated, the game can be smoothly progressed by eliminating the loss fluctuation without reach and the small hit fluctuation in a short time as much as possible. It's for. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big win game) immediately after the stop, so the player's sense of expectation is increased. I don't provoke you in vain. On the other hand, when out-of-reach variation or big-hit variation (that is, "reach variation") is performed, or "reach-swaying-out variation" (a kind of variation without reach), which is actually a normal variation pretending to be reach variation, is performed. 55(c)→(d), (c)→(e)→( f) see).

While the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed in this way, if the production pattern 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unraveled pattern) as a result of the variable display, it becomes "loose". On the other hand, when the performance pattern 8 is displayed in the big win mode (double number) as a result of the variable display, the big win game becomes executable, and when the big win game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a are switched to the big win game performance. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the jackpot game. Since the jackpot game when the production pattern 8 is displayed in the second jackpot mode in the state B is related to "15R third jackpot" or "4R fourth jackpot", the jackpot game production is 15R. A big win game performance for 3 big wins or a big win game performance for 4R and 4th big wins is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes state C (high-probability-low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the 2R big win mode (reach barake eyes) as a result of the variable display, the display contents on the display screen 7a are switched to the big win game effect for the 2R big win with the start of the big win game. be replaced. Then, when the started jackpot game is related to the "2R fifth jackpot" or "2R sixth jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability high base state (state B), When the jackpot game is related to the "2R 7th jackpot" or "2R 8th jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Furthermore, in the state B, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. be. Then, as a result of the variable display, the production pattern 8 is displayed in a completely separated pattern (outlier mode) (see FIG. 55(b)). In the case of a small hit in state B, a small winning game is executed, but even if the small winning game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the production pattern game production (here, the production pattern 8 is displayed as a completely loose eye), and the production during the small winning game (small winning game production) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, a small hit in state B is substantially equivalent to a loss. Then, the game state after the end of the small winning game remains in the state B as long as it does not overlap with the transition timing of the game state based on the number of variations of the special symbol.

In addition, in the low probability high base state which is the state B, when the fluctuation display of the special pattern (mainly the second special pattern) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without the occurrence of a big hit , At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (loss fluctuation), the game state shifts to state A (low probability low base state), and the production mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". do. Also, in the high-probability-high base state which is the state B, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without the occurrence of a big hit, At the end (stop) of the fluctuation display (loss fluctuation) for the predetermined number of times, the game state shifts to state C (high probability low base state), and the performance mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a description will be given of the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-probability-low base state). The game effect performed in the state C is mainly based on the result of the second special symbol suitability determination, the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) performed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, and the occurrence of a small hit. It is a production (small hit game production) associated with. State C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which many small wins can be expected to be obtained between big wins by causing small wins to occur frequently until the next big win occurs. For this reason, in the state C, a special effect is performed by linking the effect symbol game effect and the small winning game effect. Details on this point will be described later.

Further, as described above, in state C, "C" or "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect of the state C is performed under the condition that the background image corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. FIG. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-controller 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) in the same manner as in the above-described state A and state B, but in this embodiment, during the mode selection period described later The player can operate the first effect button 63a to select the effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the production patterns 8 are blue patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8" and green patterns "1" and "9". , and red symbols "3", "5", and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). Incidentally, in this embodiment, the mode (design) of the production pattern 8 is the same between the state B and the state C. As shown in FIG.

Here, the contents of the game effects (performance specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are greatly different between the "production mode C" and the "production mode D" in the state C. . Therefore, hereinafter, the game effects in each effect mode will be described by dividing into "effect mode C" and "effect mode D".

[Production mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56(a), in the production mode C, the production pattern 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and behind the production pattern 8, a background image corresponding to the production mode C is displayed. A predetermined character is displayed. Characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed facing each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of symbols is not performed. There are a plurality of types of ally characters and enemy characters, respectively. Displayed during configuration. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, effect display is performed in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character, or the ally character is attacked by the enemy character. Such a character effect (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when performed with the variable display of the identification information), and the result of the variable display is a small hit and a small win game is performed. There is a case where it is performed as a small winning game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed along with a special game after the end of the variable display).

A right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and the number of won prize balls (earned profit amount) is displayed in the lower right portion (first display portion) of the display screen 7a. A prize ball count image C1 shown is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment consists of an image (numeric image) capable of displaying a five-digit number from "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt". This prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls won by the player in the big win game, the small win game, etc., and the game state after the big win game is state B or state. When it becomes C, it indicates the number of prize balls won during that period (so-called number of prize balls won during the consecutive game period) until the game state returns to state A (except during the jackpot game). . In addition, the state C (high probability low base state) is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently (the execution frequency of small hit games increases), so it is possible to acquire prize balls in small hit games (increase possession balls). A prize ball count image C1 is displayed for production purposes. That is, as the small winning game effect, the effect display (entering ball effect) by the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect associated with the occurrence of a small hit will be described later.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, part of the display contents such as the effect suspension (reservation pattern), the right-handed instruction image M, and the background are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the production pattern 8 is started (see FIG. 57(a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 57). 57(b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so that the game can be smoothly progressed by digesting the deviation fluctuation without reach in a short time as much as possible. When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big win game, small win game) immediately after the stop. . Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (inciting effect) for increasing the player's expectation is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach variation (loss or big hit) or the reach deviation variation is performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (Fig. 57 ( c)→(d), (c)→(e)→(f)). Also, when the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on the fact that the result of the second special design propriety determination is "small hit", the variable display of the production pattern 8 is the first stop mode (left pattern → middle pattern → right symbol) (see FIG. 57(g)→(h)→(i)).

While the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed in this way, if the production pattern 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unraveled pattern) as a result of the variable display, it becomes "loose". On the other hand, when the performance pattern 8 is displayed in the big win mode (double number) as a result of the variable display, the big win game becomes executable, and when the big win game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a are switched to the big win game performance. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the jackpot game. Since the jackpot game when the production pattern 8 is displayed in the second jackpot mode in the state C is related to "15R third jackpot" or "4R fourth jackpot", in this case, it is for the 15R third jackpot. 2 jackpot game production or 4R 4th big win jackpot game production is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes state C (high-probability-low base state) (see FIG. 6).

In addition, when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in the 2R big win mode (reach barake eyes) as a result of the variable display, the display contents on the display screen 7a are switched to the big win game effect for the 2R big win with the start of the big win game. be replaced. As the jackpot game effect in this case, the effect display indicating the end of the state C, that is, the end of the advantageous state in which small wins occur frequently is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big win game. Then, when the started jackpot game is related to the "2R fifth jackpot" or "2R sixth jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability high base state (state B), When the jackpot game is related to the "2R 7th jackpot" or "2R 8th jackpot", the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, in the production mode C (state C), when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit and the variable display of the performance symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variable display is performed with normal variation and the first It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the production pattern 8 is displayed in a specific loose pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57(i)). Here, in this embodiment, the left, middle and right symbols are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols among the three symbols are the same and the remaining one is a different symbol combination ("335", "355"). , “557”, etc.) are used as specific loose eyes (small hit mode). Although the combination of symbols that constitutes a specific Barakeme (small hit mode) does not establish a reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination is also called a "reach sequence".

Of the patterns (“3”, “5”, and “7”) forming the specific loose stitches (first display mode), the patterns “3” and “5” form the specific loose stitches in state A. It is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be used, but in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific loose pattern (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the game by drawing the player's attention to the pattern type (in this example, the color type) of the production pattern.

In this embodiment, some of the green patterns (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) in state A are replaced with specific loose patterns (first However, for example, some of the production patterns (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) that are blue in state A are red. Or, in the state A, the production patterns that are blue patterns (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) and the production patterns that are green patterns (“1”, “3”, “5 , "9") (for example, "4" and "5") may be red. Further, as a pattern type, a pattern type dedicated to state C, which does not exist in state A, may be provided, and a specific loose stitch (first display mode) may be configured by the patterns belonging to this dedicated pattern type. For example, a gold pattern (gold pattern) may be provided as a pattern type exclusive to the state C, and part of the production patterns that are green in the state A may be gold in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol type that can form a specific loose pattern more conspicuous and easily attract the player's attention. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5", which are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A, are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning may be changed to the gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the red symbols (second symbol type) of “3” and “5” are symbols that can form a specific loose pattern, and the gold symbol (third symbol type) of “7” is used. can be set as a 15R jackpot mode (double number of "7") corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the pattern type (red pattern) that can constitute a specific Barakeme (small win mode) and the pattern type (gold pattern) that constitutes a specific Corolla (15R big win mode) are clearly distinguished, It is possible to show the correspondence between the type and the pattern type in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when deriving display (stopping variable display) of the small hit mode (ready-to-win arrangement of red symbols) in production mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol → The variable display of the production pattern 8 is stopped in the order of stopping from the middle pattern to the right pattern). Therefore, not only the small winning mode (ready-to-win arrangement of red symbols), but also the stopped mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small winning mode, attracts the player's attention. Furthermore, in the production mode C, when deriving the small-hit mode (stopping the variable display), the production display that emphasizes the display of the small-hit mode (ready-to-win arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending in the lateral direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small win mode, and the periphery of each symbol An effect image E (drawing effect image) is displayed. Thus, the display of the small winning mode (execution of the small winning game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped by the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the performance effect of. The mode of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other modes can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game executed with the display of the small winning mode as a trigger, the won prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 for each entering ball. The number (numeric image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls entered into the second big prize hole 35 is ten prize balls for one ball entered. The number of balls is added in units of 10. Furthermore, when a small winning game is executed with the display of the small winning mode as a trigger, a friend character (first character) and an enemy character ( A second character) is used to perform an effect display (character effect). Specifically, one of an ally character and an enemy character (for example, an ally character) attacks or launches an attack on the other (for example, an enemy character). and The character presentation (also referred to as "character presentation display") in this case does not include a battle presentation, which depicts a confrontation scene between the two characters, which will be described later. The execution period of the small winning game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning big winning hole (second big winning hole 35), but the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game is 1. This is because, since it is eight seconds, it is difficult to ensure the execution time of the battle presentation in this time. By performing a character effect in conjunction with a small winning game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character effect and a character effect performed as a variable effect described later have a relationship, and from the variable display. It is possible to obtain a performance (character performance) with a sense of unity between the ally character and the enemy character in the small winning game. Here, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 associated with the small hit is performed by subscribing the second big winning hole entry ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big winning hole sensor 35a. The character effect display accompanying the small win is performed based on the reception by the control unit 90, and the display of the character effect accompanying the small win is based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the small win opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since it is performed, all of these effects correspond to small winning game effects (S4407, S4408). Incidentally, the effect of adding and displaying the number of won prize balls (the amount of profit obtained) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as "first profit effect".

Thus, in the production mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the production pattern 8 and the display of the small hit mode (ready-to-win arrangement of the red pattern) occur with high frequency. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character performance display can be executed with high frequency, the occurrence of the small win is strongly encouraged to the player by the cooperation between the performance symbol game performance (fluctuation performance) and the small winning game performance. It is possible to make an impression. As a result, it is possible to heighten the expectation for the acquisition of prize balls (increase in holding balls) by frequent occurrence of small hits, and increase the interest in the game in production mode C (state C). Note that the character effect display associated with the small win is performed based on the reception of the second big winning hole entry ball command from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game, the character effect is not performed. It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game.

Next, the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the ready-to-win variation (loss or big hit) or the out-of-reach variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the production mode C, the production pattern game production (variable display of the production pattern 8, etc.) is performed in a state where the friend character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a. ) is performed (see FIG. 56(a)). In addition, when the reach variation (loss or big hit) is performed and when the reach swing loss variation is performed, the variable display of the production pattern 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern). (See FIGS. 57(c)→(d), (c)→(e)→(f)). Under these circumstances, when the variable display of the performance pattern 8 is started based on the variable performance pattern of the reach fluctuation or the reach deviation fluctuation, after that, the left pattern (the production pattern 8L) is stopped first according to the second stop mode. However, (see FIG. 57(c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either the friendly character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent. (First production) is performed. The first effect in this case is the effect (character effect) by the characters (ally character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. This first effect can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first effect pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks a friendly character (" Also referred to as a first production pattern B"), and furthermore, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the content (type) of the attack to be launched, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. By providing such multiple types of patterns, the content of the performance when the first performance is performed suggests information about the current variation display (the variation) (reliability of the big hit, details of the performance that can be executed later, etc.) (notice) shall be given. Note that the first effect is a effect that ends when one of the ally character and the enemy character launches an attack on the other character, and does not include a battle effect, which will be described later.

For example, if the first effect pattern (also referred to as "first effect pattern") is the first effect pattern A (the pattern in which the ally character launches an attack), at least the 2R big win mode is not displayed as a result of the variable display. In other words, it suggests that the big win that triggers the end of state C, which is an advantageous state in which small wins frequently occur, does not occur. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without establishing a ready-to-win state, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely loose pattern (outgoing mode). Or (fluctuation of reach-flanking loss), or although reach is established and develops into reach production, the middle pattern finally stops with a pattern different from the left and right patterns, and the production pattern 8 is displayed in a reach-breaking pattern (outgoing mode) (Reach out variation), or the effect pattern 8 is displayed in double eyes (big hit mode) after the reach performance (big hit variation). On the other hand, if the first effect pattern is the reverse first effect pattern B (the pattern in which the enemy character launches an attack), the 2R big hit mode that triggers the end of state C is displayed as a result of the variable display. suggest that it is possible. In this case, in the variation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without establishing a ready-to-win state, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely loose pattern (outgoing mode). Or (fluctuation of reach swing loss), although the reach was established and developed into a reach production, the middle pattern finally stopped with a different pattern from the left and right patterns, and the production pattern 8 was a reach breakout (loose mode or 2R jackpot mode). Either it is displayed (out-of-reach variation or 2R big hit variation), or the production pattern 8 is displayed in doubles (big hit mode) after the reach performance (big hit variation). In this way, the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol) determines the subsequent development of the variation (whether or not the ready-to-win is established, whether or not the development is advantageous for the player, etc.). It is possible to suggest Then, the first effect pattern A suggests that the subsequent development is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of the plurality of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided whether to do it.

After the left pattern (the production pattern 8L, the first stop pattern) is thus stopped (after the execution of the first production), the right pattern (the production pattern 8R, the second stop pattern) is stopped according to the second stop mode. When the right pattern to be stopped becomes a pattern (number) different from the left pattern, reach is not established, after that, the middle pattern (the production pattern 8C, the third stop pattern) stops and the fluctuation display ends, and the production pattern 8 is displayed. It is displayed in a complete loose pattern (outside aspect). In this case, the fluctuation is the reach-out swing fluctuation (see FIG. 57(c)→(e)→(f)).

On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the ready-to-win state is established. At this point, the variation is the reach variation (see FIG. 57(c)→(d)). When a ready-to-win game is established, a predetermined ready-to-win effect (also referred to as a “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is the character (friend character, enemy character) effect ( Character production), and in this embodiment, it is performed as a battle production depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character, which has been displayed as a background until then. This second effect (battle effect) can be broadly divided into a pattern in which the friendly character wins the confrontation (battle) (also referred to as “second effect pattern A”) and a pattern in which the friendly character loses the confrontation (battle). (also referred to as "second effect pattern B") and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without a winner being decided (also referred to as "second effect pattern C"). There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which of the ally character or the enemy character attacks first (the type of character that makes the preemptive attack), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing these multiple types of patterns, the content of the second production (battle production) when the production is performed will suggest information (jackpot reliability, etc.) related to the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation). there is

For example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as "second effect pattern"), in the second effect pattern A (friend victory pattern), the ally character makes a preemptive attack. There is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and a pattern in which the ally character finally wins. In addition, in the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and the friend character is defeated. Furthermore, in the second effect pattern C (victory undecided pattern), there is a pattern in which the friendly character makes a preemptive attack but the enemy character dodges the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a preemptive attack and the friendly character withstands the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with a preemptive attack by allied characters or enemy characters, and the production content (confrontation) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear scene, etc.) are predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and depending on the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above, which pattern among the plurality of patterns is the second effect (battle It is decided whether to execute the production).

In this embodiment, the reach variation in the production mode C is performed as a big hit variation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a big hit (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit), that is, variation When the production pattern 8 is displayed as a result of the display in double eyes (jackpot mode), a second production (battle performance) is performed. In this case, a 15R or 4R jackpot game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), and after the jackpot game, the game state returns to the state C (high probability/low base state). Therefore, the player can again play the game in an advantageous state (state C) in which small wins occur frequently after the big win game. Since the game can be continued in the state C after the jackpot game, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the ally character wins.

In addition, if the reach fluctuation in the production mode C is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is out, that is, the production pattern 8 is a reach deviation as a result of the variable display. When the game is displayed with a roll (losing state), a second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (win-lose unsettled pattern) is performed before displaying the losing state (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the losing mode is displayed). Since the game continues in the state C in this way, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without a victory or defeat being decided.

Furthermore, if the reach variation in the production mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a 2R jackpot (either of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots), that is, the variation When the production pattern 8 is displayed as a result of the display in the reach breakout pattern (2R big win mode), before the 2R big win mode is displayed (before the derivation display), a second performance based on the second production pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is performed. (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R big win game is performed after the change display is stopped (after the 2R big win mode is displayed), and the game state becomes state B (high base state) after the big win game. Therefore, for the player, when the 2R big win occurs, the game ends in an advantageous state (state C) in which small wins occur frequently. Since the game state shifts from state C to state B via the 2R jackpot, the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character loses.

Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the pattern including the content of the ally character making a preemptive attack is the second effect pattern A (friend victory pattern) and the second effect pattern C (victory undecided pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64(a)), from the player's point of view, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a. If it started with an attack, then at least it can be assumed that there is no possibility of a 2R jackpot, ie the end of state C. On the other hand, since all of the second production patterns A to C are applicable to the pattern including the content of the enemy character making a preemptive attack (see FIG. 64(a)), from the player's point of view, it is easy to reach on the display screen 7a. After the establishment, the battle production (second production) starts, and if the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts with the enemy character's preemptive attack, at that point there is a possibility of a 2R big hit (Possibility of end of state C) gender) cannot be ruled out. Then, after the enemy character's preemptive attack, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, so the change is a 2R big hit. As a result, the game in state C ends. On the other hand, after the enemy character's preemptive attack, when the friendly character finally wins and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The change is a 15R or 4R big hit change, and when the battle production ends when the friendly character dodges the enemy character's preemptive attack, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. As a result, the variation is an outlier variation, and in either case, the game in state C can continue to be executed. In this way, in the reach variation in the production mode C, by performing the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits occur frequently continues (winning, unsettled ) or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a presentation effect that arouses the player's expectation and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the variable performance (character performance) from the first performance to the second performance (battle performance), and to enhance the game interest in the performance mode C (state C). becomes.

[Production mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56(b), in the production mode D, the production pattern 8 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a smaller size (reduced size) than in other production modes such as the production mode C. is displayed (also referred to as "reduced display"), and a main image X representing a fighter plane is displayed substantially in the center of the display screen 7a. In the production mode D adopting such a screen configuration, the production pattern 8 is usually displayed in a variable manner on the upper right of the screen, and the production display mainly showing the flight of the fighter is developed on the display screen 7a. It has become a thing. Then, when the reach variation is performed, the effect pattern 8 is displayed largely in the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (development effect, etc.) covers substantially the entire display screen. It is made executable using In this embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter plane is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this can also be displayed as the main effect image. It is possible. Also in the effect mode D, similarly to the effect mode C, the right-handed instruction image M and the prize ball count image C1 are displayed.

The basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. Also in FIG. 58, for the convenience of explanation, some display contents such as performance suspension (suspension design) are omitted. First, in production mode D, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is normally displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the variable display of the symbols is not performed. When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is started (see FIG. 58(a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of normal variation (missing or small hit). It is stopped (see FIG. 58(b)). The reason why the game is stopped in the third stop mode is the same as in effect mode C described above. Incidentally, in the production mode D, the aspect of the variable display when performing the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the upper right of the display screen 7a is a switching display in which the patterns (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach variation (loss or big hit) or the reach deviation variation is performed, the main image X is hidden, and the performance pattern 8 that was displayed small (reduced display) at the upper right of the screen until then is displayed. It is displayed in a large size substantially in the center of the screen 7a, and its variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58(c)). After that, the variable display of the production pattern 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left pattern → right pattern → middle pattern) or the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle pattern) (Fig. 58 (c) → (d)→(e), (c)→(e), (d)→(f)→(g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols→middle symbol), after the main image X is hidden, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. The left and right symbols may be stopped substantially at the same time, and the middle symbols may be variably displayed (scrolled).

While the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed in this way, if the production pattern 8 is displayed in a deviating manner (unraveled pattern) as a result of the variable display, it becomes "loose". On the other hand, when the performance pattern 8 is displayed in a big win mode (double number) as a result of the variable display, a 4R or 15R big win game can be executed, and when it is displayed in a 2R big win mode (reach barake number), a 2R big win game can be executed. becomes. Since the effect during the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Also, in the production mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit, and if the variation display (small hit variation) of the production pattern 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. 58(b)). At this time, as a result of the variable display, the production pattern 8 is displayed in a specific loose pattern (small hit mode) (see FIG. 58(b)). Here, in the production mode C, the variable display associated with the small win is stopped in a first stop mode that cannot appear in other production modes, or an effect image E (production effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. , the performance pattern 8 is mainly displayed to emphasize the occurrence of a small hit. On the other hand, in the production mode D, by displaying the production pattern 8 on the upper right of the display screen 7a in a specific loose pattern (small hit mode), the occurrence of a small hit due to the stop display mode of the production pattern 8 is not reported. This is done in an unobtrusive manner, but at that time, a performance image different from the performance pattern 8 can be displayed, and the display of the performance image may suggest (advance) the occurrence of a small win to the player. I am assuming.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(a), it is possible to display a plurality of target images Y substantially in the center of the display screen 7a as the small hit variation starts. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning hole 35 in one small winning game. Since it is designed (gauge configuration) that three game balls can enter the second big winning hole 35, three target images Y are displayed corresponding to this. The display of this target image Y is based on the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect pattern game effect), and in S4505 described above, the variable effect pattern including the display of the target image Y (small effect for the effect mode D) When the hit variation effect pattern) is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this way, the player can guess that the result of the variable display is a small win. Therefore, the target image Y can also be said to be a foretelling effect image that foretells the occurrence of a small hit. It should be noted that it is also possible to include the display of the target image Y in the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above, without including it in the variable effect pattern.

Then, when the small winning variation (variation display of the production pattern 8) stops and the small winning mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small winning game is started, and the second big winning prize is opened in the small winning game. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as "destruction effect") showing how the target image Y is destroyed for each ball entered is performed (see FIG. 59(b)). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving a second large winning hole entry ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning hole sensor 35a. , which corresponds to the small winning game production (S4407, S4408). Incidentally, in this embodiment, the destruction effect represents a state in which the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from a fighter plane (main image X). Further, similarly to the production mode C, addition display of the winning ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is also performed.

The production from the start of the small hit variation to the small hit game is the basic production accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the production mode D, but in addition to this, in the production mode D, the production related to the small hit The effect based on the effect pending information stored in S4402, that is, the so-called "reserved prefetch effect" is performed. The reserve look-ahead effect (also referred to as "small-hit look-ahead effect") relating to this small hit is realized by a small-hit lookahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a small hit look-ahead production process (S5000) shown in FIG. Concretely, when setting the variable effect pattern (S4505) in the variable effect start process (S4402), the small hit look-ahead effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

In the small hit look-ahead effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during a game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, a special production will be held regarding the small hit. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this process ends without performing the processes after S5002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special design validity as the currently stored second special design reservation (second special design reservation) It is determined whether or not the suspension (also referred to as "small hit suspension") in which the determination result is a small hit is stored (S5002). This determination is performed by referring to the storage contents of the effect pending information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in S4402, that is, the effect pending information storage area (obtained information storage means) of the sub control board 90. , Including the second special figure reservation corresponding to the variable display of the production pattern 8 to be started (also referred to as "pertinent variation"), it is determined whether or not there is a small hit reservation (S5002). In addition, the thing of small hit reservation is also called "specific acquisition information."

If it is determined that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored in S5002 (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processing after S5003, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined that (YES in S5002), including the variation (variation display to be started from now), it is determined whether or not small hits occur three times or more consecutively as a result of the variation display (S5003). In other words, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, including the second special figure reservation corresponding to the variation (S5003). This determination can also be made by referring to the effect pending information (stored contents of the effect pending information storage area) stored in the above S4402.

At S5003, if it is determined that three or more small hits are not continuously stored (NO at S5003), this process is finished without performing the processes after S5004. In this case, the small-hit lookahead effect (small-hit continuous notice) based on the small-hit lookahead effect process (S5000) is not started. However, when the variation is a small winning variation corresponding to a small winning reservation, as described above, by setting a variation rendering pattern including the display of the target image Y as a variation rendering pattern related to the variation, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect is performed with the display of a plurality of (three in this example) target images Y (see FIG. 59(a)). That is, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect suggesting the occurrence of a small hit in the variation (the variation notice).

On the other hand, when it is determined that three or more small hit suspensions are continuously stored in S5003 (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect related to a small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small winning game will be played three times or more in succession, that is, it is determined that the small winning is derived as a result of each of three or more continuous fluctuation displays. (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) performs a start lottery for the specific period (a kind of random number lottery for determining the production) as a determination as to whether or not to start the specific period. (YES in S5004), the processing of S5005 to S5007 for starting the specific period is to be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the two conditions of (1) three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning the starting lottery for a specific period are satisfied, a specific period is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are conditions for starting the specific period.

When it is determined to start a specific period in S5004 (YES in S5004), a specific period counter is set (S5005), a specific period flag is turned ON (S5006), and a small hit look-ahead production pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, if it is determined not to start the specific period (NO in S5004), the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit reservations determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, "3" or "4" is set (S5005). After setting the specific period counter in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display (minor hit fluctuation) stops (ends) thereafter. In addition, the specific period flag is a flag that indicates that it is during a specific period, mainly at the start of the variable production (S4404, S5001, etc.) ) is a flag that is referred to when storing the performance pending information based on (S4402). After being turned ON in S5006, the specific period flag is turned OFF when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

In addition, in the present embodiment, three or more small hit reserves are continuously stored (YES in S5003), and when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to set the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, and to set the effect pattern B in the case of an affirmative determination. In this way, when three or more small winning reserves are continuously stored, it is possible to provide a case where a small winning prediction performance is executed and a case where it is not executed, so that the performance can be diversified. Become.

When the small hit look-ahead production pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variation production start command for starting the small hit look-ahead production based on the set production pattern together with the production symbol game production is sent to the image control board 100. It is transmitted, and as a result, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a small hit look-ahead effect is started together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and an effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. , the main image X (see FIG. 56(b)) is hidden, and the characters "Continuous GET!!" are displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(a)).

After that, the specific period display area T ( second display section) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(b)). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T is composed of an image (numeric image) capable of displaying a three-digit number from "000" to "999" and a character image of "pt". Each time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game executed with the display of the small winning mode as a trigger, the number of prize balls paid out for that one entering ball. (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61(c)). It is added to the prize ball count image C2 (the number of won prize balls) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61(d)). Also, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second big winning hole 35 but also the third starting hole 26, the prize balls are paid out for each ball entering (each ball entering). The number of prize balls image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61(c)), and the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls image S is displayed as the number of prize balls count image. It is added to C2 (the number of winning balls) and displayed (see FIG. 61(d)). As a result, the display of the number of prize balls image S and the addition display of the number of prize balls image C2 are more likely to be performed during the specific period, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect of these ball-entering effects. Incidentally, the effect of adding and displaying the number of won prize balls (the amount of profit obtained) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as "second profit effect".

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are input transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of game balls by the third starting hole sensor 26a and the second big winning hole sensor 35a. It is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving a ball command (special figure 2 start ball command, second big winning hole ball command) (S4407, S4408). In addition, since the ball entering the third starting hole 26 can occur other than during the small winning game, the display of the winning ball number image S and the addition of the winning ball count image C2 based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26 The display can also be executed as an effect during the variable display between the previous small winning game and the subsequent small winning game, for example. Further, during the specified period, the winning ball count image C1 displayed in the lower right portion of the screen (first display portion) is not displayed. This indicates the number of won prize balls during a specific period in which small winning games are played three times or more in succession (during a small winning period), distinguishing it from the number of winning balls obtained by small winning games during a non-specific period. Because.

The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above are all of the small hit reserves (three or four in this embodiment) stored at the start of the specific period. ) is performed until the small hit variation corresponding to ) and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small winning variations and small winning games corresponding to all the small winning holdings are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T displayed until then is erased from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61(e)), and the number of won prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed on the lower right of the screen (first display section). 61(e)→(f)). According to the production based on the small hit look-ahead production pattern A, the profit production (first profit production, second profit production) is produced by changing the display mode of the number of won prize balls (the amount of profit acquired). It is possible to enhance the effect. In addition, the form of effect display based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the number of prize balls image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. For example, the specific period display area T is horizontally long and displayed near the upper left part of the display screen 7a, and the prize number image S is displayed at the bottom of the specific period display area T. It is possible to adopt various display modes such as

On the other hand, when the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), and the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is performed, with the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8 (small hit change), A plurality of target images Y (see FIG. 59(a)) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning hole in the number of small winning games corresponding to the number (three or four) of small winning reserves stored at the time when the variable display is started. It is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter 35. As described above, in this embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small-hit game (see FIG. 59(a)), an effect based on the small-hit look-ahead effect pattern B (predetermined effect) 9 or 12 target images Y are displayed. In other words, the number of target images Y to be displayed (predetermined effect mode) differs depending on the number of stored small win reserves. Due to the display of the target pattern Y, all the results of the variable display that is performed continuously a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display become a small hit (specific display result) (small It is possible to suggest to the player the continuous occurrence of hits. After that, every time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 35 while the small winning game is played for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved small winnings at the start of the performance based on the small winning prediction performance pattern B. , the target image Y is destroyed (see FIG. 59(b)).

Note that the effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y and the destruction effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter directly indicating the number of stored small winnings is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used for entering the second big winning hole 35. A predetermined character image is displayed over a period during which the performance is updated based on the performance and the variation of the small win based on the reserve of the small win is performed, and the display mode (movement of the character, etc.) of the character image is transferred to the second big prize winning port 35. Various effects, such as an effect that changes based on the number of balls entered, can be set as the predetermined effects. Further, it is also possible to provide a plurality of production patterns (predetermined production production patterns) corresponding to the small hit look-ahead production pattern B, and to select and set one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit look-ahead effect.

As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display by the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56(b)), small hits occur frequently, so that the ball enters the second big winning hole 35. Since the performance (first profit performance, second profit performance) based on the above can also be executed with high frequency, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the performance related to the small win and improve the game interest. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hits pending ("3" or more in this embodiment), when a specific period is started as a kind of small hit look-ahead effect and the specific period display area T is displayed, that Since the display of the number of prize balls image S and the addition display of the number of prize balls image C2 (second profit effect) are performed until the small winning reserve is completely consumed and the specific period ends, the display of the number of prize balls image S and the It is possible to secure an opportunity to perform the addition display of the prize ball count image C2, and increase the certainty that these displays will be performed. After the end of the specific period, the number of prize balls won (the number of prize balls won during the specific period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed on the bottom right of the screen (first display section). It is added (totaled) to the number of winning balls in the ball count image C1. In addition, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit reserves ("3" or more in this embodiment), a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of small win look-ahead effect even if the specific period does not start. (small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, predetermined effect) is performed, and the effect mode (in this embodiment, the number of target images Y displayed) differs depending on the number of stored small win reserves. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of the performance (small hit look-ahead performance, first profit performance, second profit performance, etc.) executed along with the small win, and to enhance the game interest in the performance mode D (state C). Become.

Next, the content of the effect display (effect mode) when the reach fluctuation (loss or big hit) or the reach fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D will be described. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (the effect symbol 8 variable display, etc.) is performed (see FIGS. 56(b) and 58(a)). In addition, when the reach variation (loss or big hit) is performed and when the reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is hidden after the start of the variable display of the production pattern 8, and until then The effect pattern 8 that has been displayed is displayed largely in the approximate center of the screen, and is variably displayed by vertical scrolling. It stops in the stop mode (left and right symbols simultaneous stop→middle symbol) (see FIG. 58(c) onwards). At this time, when the left pattern and the right pattern stop at the same pattern (number) (see FIG. 58(e)), reach is established, and after that, before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display), a predetermined A reach performance is performed. The ready-to-win effect is executed based on the variable effect pattern set at S4505 described above, and the content of the ready-to-win effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

Here, the ready-to-win effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect to be executed as the ready-to-win effect in the effect mode C described above. A battle production (confrontation production) depicting a confrontation scene is provided, and a plurality of third production patterns having different contents of the battle production are provided. That is, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D can also be broadly divided into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as a "third effect pattern A") There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as "third effect pattern B"), and a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) ends without a winner being decided (also referred to as "third effect pattern C"). For each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the types of enemy characters, the types of preemptive attacking characters, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third production pattern A (friend victory pattern) is also referred to as "first variable production pattern", and the third production pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is also referred to as "second fluctuation production pattern". The effect pattern C (win-lose unsettled pattern) is also called a "third variable effect pattern". In addition, in the third production (battle production) pattern, the details of attacks (for example, the type of weapon used when attacking, the type of technique, etc.) for each of the friendly characters and the enemy characters are shown in patterns with strong attack power (" (also called "strong pattern") and a pattern with weak attack power (also called "weak pattern") are provided. In this embodiment, among the patterns in which an ally character attacks an enemy character, a strong pattern (also referred to as a "strong ally pattern") is more likely to allow the ally character to win than a weak pattern (also referred to as a "weak ally pattern"). It is used to indicate high quality. Also, among the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also called a "strong enemy pattern") has a higher chance of the enemy character winning than a weak pattern (also called a "weak enemy pattern"). It is intended to indicate that By these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest to the player the development and result of the battle presentation.

In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach deviation fluctuation is performed in the production mode D, an image (also known as a "preview image") that foretells (suggests) the contents of the subsequent game that may be executed through the reach production in the fluctuation ) can be displayed (see FIG. 65). The display of the notice image is a kind of notice effect (preview effect pattern) set at S4506 described above according to the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D set at S4505 described above, and is a type of notice effect set in advance at S4506. When an advance notice effect (an advance notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the notice image is selected (set) based on a effect determination table (not shown), a predetermined change is made in executing the variable display (variation effect). is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the notice image, such as the start of the variable display, the establishment of the ready-to-win state, and the after establishment of the ready-to-win state. However, the timing to start displaying the notice image in the fluctuation of the reach swing loss is determined from the start of the fluctuation display until it is determined that the reach is not established (the reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol stops). . This is because the reach does not materialize in the reach swing-off fluctuation. In this embodiment, the display start timing of the forewarning image due to the fluctuation of the reach deviation is set to the start of the fluctuation display. The display of the preview image enables the player to guess the development of the game that can be executed after the change. It should be noted that the display of the notice image may not be based on the notice effect pattern, but may be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. Further, the preview image can be said to be "information about the game after the end of the variable display", and the effect of displaying the preview image is also called "information display effect".

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the lower part of the display screen 7a is used as a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in this area when the preview image is displayed. In FIG. 65(a), the left pattern (production pattern 8L) and the right pattern (production pattern 8R) stopped by establishment of the ready-to-win state are each displayed small in the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, and the ready-to-win effect is mainly performed in the center of the screen. It shows the state (reach state) to be performed. As a notice image that can be displayed in the notice image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65(b), there is a first notice image that announces (suggests) the occurrence (implementation) of the big win (15R third big win or 4R fourth big win). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of the production mode D (state C), and foretelling (suggesting) the transition to the production mode E (state B). There are three types of preview images, namely, a third preview image 503 (third information). At least two types of preview images among them can be displayed in the preview image display area U when the display of the preview images is started (the information display effect is started). The display of such a preview image enables the player to make alternative guesses about the future development of the game, so it is possible to attract the player's interest in the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. In addition, since the content suggested by the first to third preview images is based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of such a preview image allows the effect mode D (state C) to be displayed. ), it is possible to increase the interest in the game in production mode D (state C). The mode (display position, size, shape, etc.) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example shown in FIG. , or a vertically elongated preview image display area U is provided on the left or right part of the display screen 7a, and the first to third preview images are displayed in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the preview image display area U. It is possible to adopt various aspects, such as enabling them to be displayed side by side.

The first notice image 501 contains the characters "big hit", the second notice image 502 contains the characters "continue", and the third notice image 503 contains the characters "mode E". be done. In the present embodiment, when displaying a preview image, two types of preview images are displayed. and a second preview image 502", and a second display pattern that displays a "second preview image 502 and a third preview image 503" shown in FIG. 65(d). . In addition to this, a display pattern for displaying "first preview image 501 and third preview image 503" may be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are three types of preview images. More types of preview images may be provided, such as providing preview images according to the type of the jackpot. In this case as well, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (preview effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

Which preview image to display among the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is determined by the type of preview effect (preview effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, when the reach swing-off variation is performed (reach swing-off variation effect pattern), from the start of the fluctuation, the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502 (first display pattern) or the second preview image 502 and A third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the preview image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is changed by stopping the left pattern (effect pattern 8L) and the right pattern (effect pattern 8R). This is done until reach failure is confirmed. After the start of display of the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), when reach failure is confirmed, the preview image that has been displayed until then is erased from the screen. In this case, the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is ended (stopped) without performing the ready-to-win effect after that.

Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern for displaying the preview image is made by selecting the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. Random numbers for display pattern determination that take values in the range of 99 are used. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selectivity of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by this display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66 , in the reach swing-off fluctuation, it is possible to display both the preview image by the first display pattern and the preview image by the second display pattern. The latter has a higher feasibility than the other (the selection rate of the first display pattern is "30%" and the selection rate of the second display pattern is "70%").

On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation performance pattern), the variation is the big hit variation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being the big hit (15R third big win or 4R fourth big win). , that is, when the production pattern 8 is displayed in double eyes (jackpot mode) as a result of the variable display (jackpot fluctuation production pattern), before the big hit mode is displayed (before derived display), the third production A third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed. In addition, after the change display is stopped (after the big win mode is displayed), the big win game is performed, and the game in the state C can be continued after that, so the third effect pattern A (first change effect pattern) is It is a pattern that the ally character wins. Then, in the variation (jackpot variation), a notice image is displayed (information display performance) at a predetermined time during the variation before the third performance (battle performance) starts, such as when the variation starts or when reach is established. is started. The preview image in this case can be displayed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first preview image 501 and the second preview image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65(c)), the player receives at least It can be inferred that there is no possibility of a 2R jackpot occurring, that is, there is no possibility that the game will end in state C (possibility that the subsequent development of the game will be disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65(d)), the player can expect a 2R big win at that time. The possibility (possibility that later development of the game becomes unfavorable) cannot be ruled out.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the notice image in the case where the third effect (battle effect in which a teammate wins) is executed based on the third effect pattern A in the variation of the big hit is displayed in the first display pattern rather than the second display pattern. The display pattern is designed to increase the possibility of execution (see FIG. 66). Therefore, the display of the forewarning image by the first display pattern is more likely to result in a big hit than the display of the forewarning image by the second display pattern, because the degree of expectation of the teammate's victory in the battle production, i.e., the production pattern 8 is displayed in a big win mode. It can be said that the degree of expectation (jackpot reliability) that the game (15R jackpot game or 4R jackpot game) is executed is high. Further, when the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the "strong ally pattern" in the variation of the big hit, the execution possibility of displaying the notice image according to the first display pattern is made higher. (See FIG. 66).

Further, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is the "strong ally pattern" and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined period of time after the start of display of the preview image (for example, allied characters and enemies At the start of the character confrontation, at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as during the confrontation, the first notice image 501 (jackpot) may be displayed enlarged compared to the beginning of the display in the notice image display area U. (See FIG. 65(e)). This enlarged display of the preview image is based on the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above. done. Also, as the first preview image 501 is enlarged, the second preview image 502 (continued) is displayed smaller than when the display was started, or is deleted (deleted in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. As a result, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the ally strong pattern, and there is a possibility that a big hit (15R third big win or 4R fourth big win) will occur as a result of the variation (battle effect). It is possible to enhance the player's sense of anticipation, sense of security, etc. by suggesting to the player that the value of the game is high. When the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is erased, the confirmation of the big win may be announced by the display (notification of the confirmation of the big win). In addition, after the first preview image 501 is enlarged and the second preview image 502 is displayed in a reduced size, the first preview image 501 is further enlarged and the second preview image 502 is erased. The display mode of the preview image being displayed in U may be changed step by step. In addition, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the characters "big hit" in the first preview image 501 may be changed to "super jackpot" suggesting a 15R jackpot, or the colors of the characters "big hit" and its background may be changed to other colors. The text, color, shape, and the like forming the preview image may be changed, such as by changing the color of the preview image. Furthermore, such a change in characters and the change in the display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be combined so as to be executable.

On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the "strong ally pattern", that is, the "weak ally pattern", the "strong enemy pattern", or the "weak enemy pattern", , the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and the display mode of the preview image does not change in any of these three patterns. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. It should be noted that even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the "strong ally pattern", it is possible to perform the enlarged display of the first preview image 501. In this case, in the case of the "strong ally pattern" The feasibility of enlarged display (change in display mode) may be made lower than in the case of . This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display of the preview image (change in display mode).

Also, when reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is performed as a deviation variation (reach deviation variation) based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is out, i.e. , When the production pattern 8 is displayed in a reach-loose pattern (outgoing mode) as a result of the variable display (reach-out fluctuation production pattern), before the outgoing mode is displayed (before the derived display), a third production pattern C (win/loss not The third effect (variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. It should be noted that after the change display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the game is continued in the state C, so the third effect pattern C (third change effect pattern) is a confrontation (battle) without deciding the winner. It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the variation (out-of-reach variation), the first preview image 501 and the second The display of the second preview image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second preview image 502 and the third preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed according to the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of a 2R big win (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed according to the second display pattern, the player has no possibility of at least a big win (15R third big win or 4R fourth big win) as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be assumed that no In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (battle effect of undecided victory or defeat) based on the third effect pattern C is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation is changed to the first display pattern and the second display. The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility of each pattern is the same (see FIG. 66).

Here, since the display of the notice image in the first display pattern (big win or continuation) is also a display suggesting that the game in state C can be executed even after that, the game in state C ends. It does not give the player anxiety such as putting it away. On the other hand, the display of the notice image in the second display pattern (continuation or production mode E) cannot eliminate the possibility of the occurrence of the 2R jackpot, and it is possible that the game in state C cannot be continued. Since it also includes sexuality, it gives the player such anxieties. The display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern in such out-of-reach fluctuations is performed at a predetermined time after the start of display (for example, at a predetermined time during a confrontation between a friendly character and an enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). , only the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other preview images (the first preview image 501 or the third preview image 503) are erased (change in display mode of the preview image). As a result, the player recognizes that the big win (15R 3rd big win or 4R 4th big win) does not occur as a result of the change (battle performance), and the game is continued in the state C. can be done. The display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continued) is finally left in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

In addition, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, the big hit mode is not displayed as a result of the fluctuation display (the big hit is not generated), so the first notice image as described above is displayed in the first notice image by the first display pattern. Enlarged display of 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach variation, after starting the display of the preview image by the first display pattern or the second display pattern, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executed. The second notice image 502 is a notice image that foretells (suggests) the continuation of the state C in which small wins occur frequently, and the enlarged display of the second notice image 502 does not allow the player to obtain a profit from the occurrence of the big win. Since it is announced (suggested) that the state C is highly likely to be continued, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C will end.

In addition, when reach variation is performed (reach variation effect pattern), the variation is based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots). When performed as a 2R big hit variation, that is, when the production pattern 8 is displayed in a reach breakout (2R big hit mode) as a result of the variation display (2R big hit variation production pattern), before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derived display) ), a third effect (variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is performed. After the change display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), the 2R jackpot game is performed, the game state after the jackpot game becomes state B (high base state), and the game is continued in state C. Since it cannot be done, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated. Then, in the variation (2R jackpot variation), the second notice image 502 and the 3 The display of the preview image 503 (second display pattern) is started. From the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player guesses that there is a possibility of a 2R big win (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In this embodiment, the display of the notice image in the case where the third effect (battle effect of teammate defeat) based on the third effect pattern B is executed in the 2R big hit variation is not executed in the first display pattern. It is assumed that only the second display pattern is executed (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in state C ends due to the occurrence of the 2R jackpot (relative This is because it would be cruel to the player if the game development would be disadvantageous in terms of the game. By doing this, the display of the preview image and the third effect (battle effect) are coordinated, and when the preview image is displayed (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect) is executed, the player feels uncomfortable or distrusted. It is possible to prevent the user from having feelings or the like.

After that, the display of the preview image according to the second display pattern in the variation (2R big hit variation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, at a predetermined time during the confrontation between the friendly character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third preview image 503 (production mode E) is displayed, and the second preview image 502 (continue) is erased (change in display mode of the preview image). As a result, the player can recognize that two big wins (one of the 2R fifth to eighth big wins) have occurred as a result of the change (battle effect), and that the game in state C has come to an end. can. The display of the preview image, in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) is finally left in the preview image display area U, continues until the end of the variable display.

Thus, in the production mode D, when the reach fluctuation or the reach deviation fluctuation is performed, based on the fluctuation production pattern related to the fluctuation, the content of the game (game development) that can be executed after the fluctuation is announced (suggested). A preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (preview image display area U). This preview image includes a first preview image 501 (first information) that heralds (suggests) the occurrence of a big win (15R third big win or 4R fourth big win) that triggers the setting of state C (high probability/low base state). , a second notice image 502 (second information) for notifying (suggesting) the continuation of state C, and notifying (suggesting) that the game state will shift to state B (game end in state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ), and the display patterns of these preview images are a first display pattern consisting of a combination of a first preview image 501 and a second preview image 502, and a second preview image. 502 and a second display pattern consisting of a combination of the third preview image 503 . The display of the notice image based on such a first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed from the start of the change before the failure of the reach is confirmed in the case of the change in the lack of reach, and in the case of the change in the reach, the third effect from the start of the change. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of (battle production) becomes clear (before the end of the battle production or the change), state C (advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently) continues (victory , unsettled) or to end (defeat). In addition, when the reach variation is a big hit variation, depending on the aspect of the third effect (battle effect) in the variation (strong ally pattern, weak ally pattern, etc.), the third effect is executed after the preview image starts to be displayed. At a predetermined time during the middle (during battle production), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and suggests at an early stage before the end of the change that there is a high possibility that the subsequent development of the game will be advantageous to the player. It is possible to enhance the player's sense of anticipation, sense of security, and the like.

[Mode selection period]
Next, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of state C will be described. As described above, when the game state is controlled to the state C (high-probability-low base state), one of the production modes C and D is set, and selection of the production mode to be set can be performed based on the player's operation of the first effect button 63a. The selection of this effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-probability-low base state) occurs. In this pachinko game machine 1, the "4R first jackpot", "15R third jackpot" and "4R fourth jackpot" are the jackpots that trigger the setting of state C (high probability/low base state) (see FIG. 6 ), it becomes possible to select the performance modes C and D at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big win game, a mode selection period is generated in which the performance mode after the end of the big win game can be selected from two performance modes C and D. The generation timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period differs between the "4R first big win" and the "4R fourth big win" and the "15R third big win". In addition, the generation of the mode selection period, the selection of the production mode based on the operation of the first production button 63a during the mode selection period, etc., control processing related to production mode selection, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) by It is executed under control, and specifically, it is executed by winning game effect processing (S4408) of received command analysis processing (S4302).

First, when a jackpot pattern (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and a "4R first jackpot" occurs, that is, when a "4R first jackpot" occurs as the first hit, and the state Mode selection when a "4R 4th big win" occurs when a big win pattern (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game), that is, when a "4R 4th big win" occurs as a consecutive game. The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game are completed. Here, as described above, when the final round of the jackpot game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes "0"), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command. (S2116), start the jackpot ending period (S2117). When the sub-controller 90 receives the ending command, it becomes possible for the sub-controller to recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, "4R ending command" for "4R first jackpot" and "4R fourth jackpot", and "15R ending command" for "15R third jackpot". It is provided according to the type of jackpot. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In this embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is "15 seconds", and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is "5 seconds." second. It should be noted that the ending time shown in this embodiment is just an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the game playability, and the like.

Upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control section 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control section). In response to this, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 executes an ending effect. When this ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 indicating "effect mode C" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode C selection image") and an image 702 indicating "effect mode D" (hereinafter also referred to as "mode D selection image"). are arranged side by side, and an image 703 imitating the first effect button 63a (hereinafter also referred to as "button image") is arranged between the left and right. By displaying the mode selection screen 700 as described above, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress.

When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is being displayed, the image 701 (mode C selection image) and the image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternate with each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is displayed as being selected (see FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b)). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the currently selected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed (highlighted) with a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is darkened (dark display). there is Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, thereby selecting the subsequent state C (high probability/low base state) effect mode. can do.

Also, in this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, when 12 seconds have passed since the start of the mode selection period (the start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period starts above the button image (Fig. 62(c) reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numeric image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 from "3"→"2"→"1". This countdown display informs the player that the mode selection period will soon end (notification before the end of the selection period). Shortly after the number image 704 becomes "1" in the countdown display, the countdown display ends, and the mode selection period ends. At this time, the mode selection image highlighted (surrounded by a thick frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, an effect display (not shown) indicating transition to state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The production mode (C or D) thus selected is set as the production mode of state C that is subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in state C, the production mode (C or D) that is set (selected) Under the production pattern game production is executed.

On the other hand, when a big hit pattern (specific display result) is displayed in state B or C (right-handed game) and a "15R third big win" occurs, that is, a "15R third big win" occurs as a consecutive game. The mode selection period in this case occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in this embodiment, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R among 1R to 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub-control unit 90 receives the round start , it becomes possible to recognize the start of the round game on the sub-control part side. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), such as "1R start command", "2R start command", . . . "15R start command".

When the sub-control unit 90 receives a "13R start command" designating the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) which is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of the 13R, it responds to this. A round effect command to play is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 13R round effect is executed. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that mode selection is possible from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period will start from the next round (14R in this embodiment) (notification before start of selection period, first notification means). In this way, after notifying in advance that the selection of the production mode is possible (the mode selection period starts), the production mode in a new manner such as the occurrence (start) of the production mode selection period selection becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the presentation mode selection.

The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image showing the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The winning ball count image C1 displayed here is displayed in addition for each ball entering the first big winning hole 30 (reception of the first big winning hole entry command) during the big win game. It is continuously displayed even in the state C after the end of the big win game, and the subsequent ball entering the second big winning hole 35 in the small win game or the first big win in the big win game. An addition display is also made when a ball enters the winning hole 30. - 特許庁Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of prize balls won during the period from the first hit.

Next, when the sub-controller 90 receives the "14R start command" designating the start of the 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, it transmits the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). do. In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 14R round effect is executed. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). , the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) during the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above. there is By displaying the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode selection period is in progress (selection period notification, second notification means). Effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upper and lower switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection at 14R is omitted. The screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed during the mode selection period during the ending period. A selection screen 900 may be displayed.

Next, when the sub-controller 90 receives the "15R start command" specifying the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-controller 90 outputs the corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit ). In response to this, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a 15R round effect is executed. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63(c), a 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (on the upper left side of the screen in this embodiment). , the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, the countdown display starts with the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period (see FIG. 62(c)). It decreases with "1" (see FIG. 63(d)). By this countdown display, the player is informed that the mode selection period will soon end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of 15R), the countdown display ends, thereby ending the mode selection period.

Thereafter, until 15R ends, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed together with the round effect screen 800 on the display screen 7a, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. This selected production mode (C or D) is set as the production mode of state C that is subsequently executed (started), and thereafter, in state C, the set (selected) production mode (C or D) Under the production pattern game production is executed.

In this way, when a big hit that triggers the setting of state C (high-probability-low base state) occurs, the production mode of state C is changed to "production mode C ” or “Production Mode D” is generated. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, the case where the 4R first big win occurred in state A (left-handed game) and the 15R third big win occurred in state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs from case to case. In other words, the timing of occurrence of the mode selection period differs between the first hit in state A, which is a game state in which a left-handed game is performed, and the case of consecutive wins in state B or C, which is a game state in which a right-handed game is performed. It has become a thing. In another way, the type of jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, the 4R jackpot game (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot) or the 15R jackpot game (15R third jackpot) The timing of occurrence of the mode selection period differs depending on whether it is. Therefore, depending on the game state when the big win occurs (whether it is the first hit or the winning game) and the type of the big win game to be executed, the time when the production mode can be selected can be changed, or the production mode can be selected. It is possible to make the modes different.

Particularly, in this embodiment, when a 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games are completed, and a mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when a 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to 15R (final R) during the jackpot game (starts), but at 13R before the mode selection period occurs (before the start). , a notification screen 810 is displayed to notify that the mode selection period will start from the next round (pre-selection period start notification, see FIG. 63(a)). (notified during the selection period, see FIG. 63(b)), and at 15R, a countdown display is executed (notified before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63(c) and (d)). Thus, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are finished, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player is given the opportunity to select the production mode before the end of all the round games. given to As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance mode selection from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player regarding the performance mode selection.

The ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and in the 4R jackpot, the ending period is used to generate a mode selection period. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the negative image of the player that the number of rounds (the number of winning balls) is small and the execution period of the jackpot game is short compared to the 15R jackpot, and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Become.

Further, in this embodiment, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, the player is prompted to select the production mode after the jackpot game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). there is Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the presentation mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game). Notification before start, notification during selection period, notification before end of selection period) are performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to select the performance mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of image display device]
Next, the layout of the image display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes three image display devices (display means), the first image display device 7 , the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 . Among these three image display devices, the first image display device 7 is arranged so that its display screen 7a (display surface) faces an opening provided substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the front frame 51 (see FIG. 1).

Here, as shown in FIG. 1, a vertically long rectangular front frame 51 has a surface (game board surface) of the game board 2 in a closed state (closed state). ) is provided with a viewing window 51a (viewing portion). The viewing window 51a is made of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically long, substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the area above the batted ball supply tray 61. As shown in FIG. Through this viewing window 51a (glass plate), the player can view the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 and the display screen 7a (display contents) of the first image display device 7 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. ) etc. can be visually recognized. As described above, the front frame 51 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable (rotatable) by frame hinges 56, 56 provided at upper and lower corners on one side end (left side in this embodiment). there is

In this embodiment, a second image display device 71 is provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 and on one side (left side) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. A third image display device 72 is provided on the other side (right side) facing the end side (left side) (see FIG. 1). Each of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 consists of a liquid crystal display device that is smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and has a rectangular display that is almost square. It has screens 71a and 72a. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 maintain their respective display screens 71a and 72a in a substantially straight state (orientation) in the up-down direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front. 51a side (the inside of the front frame 51). The degree of inclination of the display screens 71a and 72a is, as shown in FIG. A predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees) is provided so that the player who plays the pachinko game machine 1 can visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a from the front of the game machine (front side). ing. In this way, since the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the visual window 51a (inside the front frame 51), the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 can be viewed through the visual window 51a. For a player who plays a game while viewing the display screen 7a (display content), it is possible to view the display screens 71a and 72a (display content) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 with a small movement of the line of sight. becomes possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

The first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) is also called "board side display means" or "first display means", and the front frame 51 (of the game area 3) The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided outside) are also referred to as "frame side display means" or "second display means", and the second image display device 71 is referred to as "first frame display means". The third image display device 72 is also called "second frame side display means" or "right display means".

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means) of the frame side display means is provided on the front upper part of one side end side (left side side) of the front frame 51. It is rotatably supported with respect to the front frame 51 by the second image display device hinge 75 . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means) is not rotatably pivotally supported like the second image display device 71, but is mounted on the other side end side (right side side) of the front frame 51. ) is attached to the front upper part of the As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured (arranged) such that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51). ), the second image display device 71 can rotate in the horizontal direction around the axis of the second image display device hinge 75, so that the tilted state (initial state, first state) and a state further tilted toward the viewing window 51a from that state (tilted state, second state). That is, the angle formed by the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees). and a tilted state (second state) in which the angle formed is a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 degrees to 100 degrees) smaller than the first angle. It has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle formed by the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined angle. It is fixed at an angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees).

The reason why the second image display device 71 is rotatable so that it can take the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (second state) is as follows. In other words, it is possible to lend out game balls (ball lending) based on the value information recorded in a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card, etc., at the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. A card unit 135 (game ball lending device) is provided, and the card unit 135 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control board 110) are connected (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 is usually adjacent to the left side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加That is, the card unit 135 is positioned on one side end side (left side) where the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 of the pachinko game machine 1 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When opening the front frame 51 or opening both the front frame 51 and the body frame 52, the front frame 51 is the axis of the frame hinges 56, 56 on one side end side (left side) of the pachinko game machine 1. centered on the card unit 135 side (the left side of the pachinko game machine 1). At this time, when frame-side display means and frame-side production means such as frame-side movable accessories are provided on one side end side (the front surface on the left side of the front frame 51) where the front frame 51 and the like are pivotally supported, There is a risk that the frame-side rendering means will come into contact with the card unit 135 and interfere with the opening of the front frame 51 and the like (rotation toward the card unit 135 side). In this regard, if the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a side facing the card unit 135 as in this embodiment, the front frame 51 By tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state) when opening the front frame 51 and the like, the existence of the second image display device 71 hinders the opening of the front frame 51 and the like. can be avoided, and the front frame 51 and the like can be opened without any trouble.

Also, in a state in which both the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operating portion of the card unit 135 is operated to record on a card (recording medium). It is assumed that the operation position or the card take-out position is near the second image display device 71 when receiving the payout of the held ball based on the held ball information or taking out the card (recording medium) from the card unit 135. Also, by tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (putting it in a tilted state), it is possible to smoothly perform the operation and removal. The second image display device 71 is made rotatable in view of the opening of the front frame 51 and the like, the operation of the card unit 135, and the like. Thereby, a second image display device 71 (first frame side display means, left display means) is provided as a frame side display means on one side end side (left side of the front frame 51) where the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode such as this, and it is possible to make the appearance of the game machine feel novelty that has not existed in the past. In particular, as in the present embodiment, not only the one side end side (the left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported, but also the other side end side (of the front frame 51) opposite to the one side end side (the left side of the front frame 51) By providing a third image display device 72 (second frame side display means, right display means) as a frame side display means on the right side) as well, the front frame 51 constituting the front face (front face) of the gaming machine is novel. As a result, the novelty of the appearance of the gaming machine becomes even more remarkable. Such novelty in appearance is effective in arousing the player's desire to play.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment also has a mechanism (maintaining means) for maintaining the initial state of the second image display device 71, which can take the initial state and the tilted state. Specifically, as means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in its initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) that biases the second image display device 71 toward one side end (left end) of the front frame 51 is used. is provided in the vicinity of the hinge 75 for the second image display device. The second image display device 71 is kept in the initial state by the biasing force of the torsion coil spring (biasing means). Therefore, in order to bring the second image display device 71 into the tilted state, for example, the back side of the second image display device 71 (the surface on the side opposite to the display screen 71a) is pushed by hand, and the torsion coil spring (biasing means) is pushed. The second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a by applying a force against the biasing force of the second image display device 71 . Further, when the front frame 51 or the like is opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 contacts the card unit 135, the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 due to the contact causes the second image display device 71 to move. It tilts (turns) toward the viewing window 51a. On the other hand, when the force for tilting (rotating) the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (force against the urging force of the torsion coil spring) is released, the second image display device 71 is released from the torsion coil spring (attached). The urging force of the urging means restores the original initial state. As a result, when the front frame 51 is closed, the second image display device 71 can be kept in the initial state, and the display screen 71a (display content) of the second image display device 71 can be visually recognized well. can ensure the integrity of the Further, the second image display device 71 tilted toward the viewing window 51a automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released. It is possible to reliably bring the device 71 to its initial state.

[Contents displayed on the image display device]
Next, the display contents of the three image display devices provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the performance symbol game performance (fluctuation performance), the advance notice performance (suggestion performance), Various effects such as jackpot game effects and demonstration effects can be executed (effect display executing means). Below, the display contents of the image display device will be explained, focusing on the production symbol game production (variation production) and the notice production (suggestion production) when the game state is controlled to state A (low-probability-low base state). .

[Display contents of production pattern game production]
First, the display contents of the image display device when the performance symbol game effect is executed in state A will be described. The effect display related to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). In state A, as described above, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode, so the background image corresponding to effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. The effect pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a under this background display. Then, depending on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect pattern set at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8, the effect display related to the ready-to-win effect, the notice effect, etc. is displayed in addition to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). It may also be executed in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). In other words, the effect display is mainly performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and the effect display is performed auxiliary on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. There is For this reason, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also called a "main display device" or a "main liquid crystal", and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72a) is also called a "sub-display device" or a "sub-liquid crystal".

In this embodiment, as the variation mode (variation pattern) of the performance pattern 8, a variation mode without reach (normal variation) and a variation mode with reach (reach variation) are provided. A normal reach effect and a super reach effect (also called "SP reach") are provided. Therefore, when the reach variation is executed, in the above-described S4505, any reach effect is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Then, when the super ready-to-win effect is executed, the possibility of a big win (big win reliability) is set to be higher than when the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

When the sub-control unit 90 receives a variation start command from the main control unit 80 under the specification of such a variation effect (S4403), the first image display is performed based on the variation effect pattern set in response to this. The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variable display starting means). If the fluctuation display is normal fluctuation without reach, reach fluctuation due to normal reach production (also referred to as "normal reach fluctuation"), reach fluctuation due to super reach production (also referred to as "SP reach fluctuation") Specific to be described later In the case of the SP reach fluctuation excluding the SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. ), and is not performed in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). However, as will be described later, the notice effect (suggestive effect, suggestive display) related to the variable display and later variable display (variable display based on special figure reservation) is the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third It may be performed on either one or both of the image display device 72 (display screen 72a). Incidentally, FIG. 67 shows an example of normal variation without reach. Also, the effect display related to the reach effect (normal reach change, SP reach change) is also called “specific display”.

Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is normally displayed on each of the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display executing means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 on which the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed, and the background image is common to the production modes A and B. This is an image, and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not perform the effect display related to the variable effect, the advance notice effect, or the like. For this reason, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also called "main background" or "main background", and the background images displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are called "secondary backgrounds". Also called "sub-background". In FIG. 67 and the like, the background images (sub-background, sub-background) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the sub-background is displayed on each of the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 71a (left The display means) displays a variation number image 710 (predetermined display) indicating the number of symbol variations. This variation frequency image 710 indicates the number of execution times (variation frequency) of the special symbol (and effect symbol) variation display performed until the next big hit occurs, and the special symbol variation display is performed once. It is configured to add 1 to the number of fluctuations indicated by the fluctuation number image 710 each time (in this embodiment, each time the fluctuation display ends). The display of the fluctuation number image 710 is performed under the control of the sub-controller 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) based on the fluctuation stop command from the main controller 80 (predetermined display executing means). On the other hand, the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the sub-background is displayed displays an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) indicating the current effect mode. This production mode image 720 shows the name of the production mode indicating the type of production mode currently set in state A (for example, ○○ mode corresponding to production mode A, △△ mode corresponding to production mode B, etc.). The display is performed based on the mode status set under the control of the sub-controller 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) (predetermined display executing means).

On the other hand, if the variation display of the effect pattern 8 to be executed is the specific SP reach variation among the SP reach variations, as an execution mode of the variation display (effect display) related to the specific SP reach variation, in this embodiment Roughly classified, two modes are provided. Specifically, one aspect of them is the reach state from the beginning of the change display related to the specific SP reach change, and the reach effect related to the change (specific SP reach effect) is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a ), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) (also referred to as “first mode”). In another aspect, at the beginning of the change display related to the specific SP reach fluctuation, the effect display related to the change is executed only on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and after the reach is established, the effect content is When developing into SP reach, the effect display related to the change is added to the first image display device 7, and either the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) or the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) This is a mode (also referred to as a "second mode") in which one or both of them are executed.

In this embodiment, the specific SP ready-to-win effect executed in state A (production mode A or B) is a showdown between an ally character and an enemy character. The contents are out of scope. Such a specific SP reach effect is also called a "specific effect". As this specific effect, the first specific effect (effect display based on the first mode) executed based on the above-described first mode (three-screen display from the beginning) and the above-mentioned second mode (initial one-screen display) and a second specific effect to be executed later based on two-screen display or three-screen display. Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), a variable display (specific SP reach fluctuation) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7. "Second specific effect A" which is executed later on the second image display device 71, and "Second effect A" which is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and later executed by the third image display device 72 as well. a specific effect B", and a "second specific effect C" which is initially executed (started) by the first image display device 7 and later executed by the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 as well. ing. Therefore, when the specific SP reach variation is executed, one of these specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effect AC) is the above-mentioned S4505, the variation pattern designation command and the variation It is set based on the production pattern determination table, and the set specific production is executed (specific display execution means, production display execution means).

Next, the display contents of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state (reach state ), and an effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left pattern (production pattern 8L) and the right pattern (production pattern 8R) in the ready-to-reach state are displayed in small sizes on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, respectively, and substantially the entire display screen 7a shows the production display indicating the start of the confrontation. is performed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). At this time, the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 displays the sub-character of the friendly character involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect ("Friend ) is displayed, and on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, in place of the sub-background and the effect mode image 720, the sub-character of the enemy character involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect is displayed. A character (also called an "enemy sub-character") is displayed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Along with the progress of the variable display, the display screen 7a displays a confrontation scene between the friendly character and the enemy character, and in the process of progressing, "The friendly sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the friendly character." "Production display", "Production display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a cheers for the enemy character", "The allied sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (on the side of the allied character). effect display", "effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. are performed.

After that, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect display (ally victory scene) is performed in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub-character) wins against the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character). When it is hit, the variation is a big hit variation, and the production pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) in doubles (big hit mode) (see FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when a display (ally defeat scene) is performed in which an ally character side (ally character, ally sub-character) is defeated by an enemy character (enemy character, enemy sub-character), the change is out of range (out-of-reach change). As a result, the performance pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-breaking pattern (missing mode) (see FIG. 69(b)).

Here, in this embodiment, the effect display of the conclusion scene (teammate victory scene or teammate defeat scene) indicating the end of the confrontation in the specific effects (first specific effect, second specific effects A to C) is mainly displayed on the display screen 7a. (main LCD) is executed. In the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C, which will be described later, when the teammate victory scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), the left display screen 71a is displayed as shown in FIG. ``Win'' is displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, and the characters ``Win'' are displayed on the display screens of the two sub-liquid crystals. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the later-described second specific effect C, when the teammate defeat scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69(b), the left display screen 71a , and the characters ``North'' are displayed on the display screen 72a on the right side, respectively, and the characters ``Loss'' are displayed on the display screens of the two sub-liquid crystals.

Further, when the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and after that, when reach is established, the The left pattern (production pattern 8L) and the right pattern (production pattern 8R) that are stopped (temporarily stopped) due to reach formation are displayed in small sizes on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, respectively. An effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the enemy characters is performed, followed by the start of the effect display indicating the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character. During this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the sub-background and the like are displayed without any special effect display related to the variable display (described later). (Except when a notice effect is performed). Up to this point, the display contents are common to the second specific effects A to C.

Then, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect A (display screen 7a→display screens 7a, 71a), as shown in FIG. Shortly thereafter, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the ally sub-character appears in the decreasing area. A production display (a friendly sub-character appearance production) is performed. After the allied sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 71a through this allied sub-character appearance effect, a confrontation scene between the allied characters and the enemy characters is displayed on the display screen 7a as the variable display progresses. , ``Production display in which the allied sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the allied character'', and ``Production display in which the allied sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (on the side of the allied character)''. etc. are performed. In the second specific effect A, when the effect display (ally winning scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins over the enemy character (ally winning scene) is performed, the change is a big hit change. is displayed (stopped display) in a double roll (jackpot mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, if a display (ally defeat scene) in which an ally character (ally character, ally sub-character) is defeated by an enemy character is performed, the change will be an out-of-reach change (out-of-reach change). is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-break pattern (disappearance mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(b)).

Although the allied sub-character appearance effect has started on the display screen 71a, the allied sub-character appearance effect ends before the allied sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a, and the entire display area of the display screen 71a becomes the secondary background. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of . In other words, it is also possible to provide an effect for the appearance of a fake allied sub-character. In this case, the display screen 71a, 72a (sub-liquid crystal) is not used, and the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is used to display the confrontation scene.

Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect B (display screen 7a→display screens 7a, 72a), as shown in FIG. Shortly thereafter, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 gradually decreases, and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character appears in the decreasing area. A production display (enemy sub character appearance production) is performed. When the enemy sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this enemy sub-character appearance effect, thereafter, along with the progress of the variable display, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a. ``Production display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character'', ``Production display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and participates in the confrontation (enemy character side)'', etc. is done. In the second specific effect B, when the effect display (friend victory scene) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is a big win change. is displayed (stopped display) in a double roll (jackpot mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, if a production display (ally defeat scene) in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the change is a loss change (reach loss change). is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-break pattern (disappearance mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(b)).

Although the enemy sub-character appearance effect has started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub-character appearance effect ends before the enemy sub-character appears on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a becomes the secondary background. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of . In other words, it is also possible to provide a false enemy sub-character appearance effect. In this case, the display screen 71a, 72a (sub-liquid crystal) is not used, and the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is used to display the confrontation scene.

Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect C (display screen 7a→display screens 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. Shortly after the start, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 gradually decreases, An effect display (sub-character appearance effect) is performed in which the silhouette of the ally sub-character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub-character (display screen 72a) appear in the decreasing area. When the sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a through this sub-character appearance effect, along with the progress of the variable display, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a. Effect display in which the ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a cheers for the ally character", ``Effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", and ``The ally sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a is displayed on the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", "enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. are performed. . In the second specific effect C, when the effect display (ally winning scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub-character) wins against the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub-character) is performed, the change is a big win change. As a result, the effect pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) in doubles (jackpot mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(a)). On the other hand, when the effect display (ally defeat scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is out of range (out of reach change) As a result, the effect pattern 8 is displayed (stopped display) in a reach-break pattern (disappearing mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69(b)).

Although the sub-character appearance effect was started on the display screens 71a and 72a, the sub-character appearance effect in which friendly sub-characters and enemy sub-characters were displayed on the entire display screens ended, and the display areas of the display screens 71a and 72a ended. It is also possible to provide a pattern that entirely reverts to displaying the secondary background. In other words, it is also possible to provide a fake sub-character appearance effect. In this case, the display screen 71a, 72a (sub-liquid crystal) is not used, and the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is used to display the confrontation scene.

With regard to the reliability of such second specific effects A to C, the reliability of the second specific effect A (ally character, ally sub-character VS enemy character) is the highest in view of the fact that the victory of the ally character results in a big win. After that, the second specific effect C (ally character, ally sub-character VS enemy character, enemy sub-character), the second specific effect B (ally character VS enemy character, enemy sub-character) in order of reliability. set to be low.

Above, we have exemplified the effect symbol game effects that can be executed in the state A. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with various variable effects (variable effect patterns) with different display contents (effect modes). Needless to say, this can also be performed using one or more of the first image display device 7 , the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 . In particular, regarding the effect display (specific display) related to the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display are displayed like the above-described first specific effect and second specific effect. By providing a mode of execution using one or both of the devices 72, it is possible to further enhance the presentation effect.

As described above, when the production symbol game production (variation production) is executed in the state A, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is mainly used, and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) are displayed. Effect display with one or both of the three-image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can be executed. Therefore, after the first image display device 7 starts the variable display of the effect pattern 8, the second image display device 71 and the third image are displayed in addition to the first image display device 7 for the effect display related to the variation. The display device 72 can also attract the player's attention, and a wide range of display inside and outside the game area is possible. As a result, it is possible to perform an impactful performance display, and increase the variety of the performance display to increase interest.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variation display based on the specific SP reach variation is executed, that is, when the specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect AC) is executed, the variable display There is also a mode (first mode) in which the effect display is performed by three image display devices from the beginning of the change display, the effect display is performed in the first image display device 7 at the beginning of the variable display, and then the second image There is also a mode (second mode) in which effect display is performed on either one or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72 . As a result, it is possible to avoid uniformity in the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display, and to increase interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

Further, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is initially started on the first image display device 7, and after that, the reach is established and the effect display showing the battle scene between the friend character and the enemy character. is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of the sub-background of either one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 gradually decreases, and the reduced display area The area changes to a display area for sub-character appearance effects. That is, an effect is executed in which the display area of the effect display related to the change is gradually expanded from the first image display device 7 to either one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. It is possible. This makes it possible to enhance interest when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed.

[Display contents of the notice effect]
Next, the display contents of the image display device when the announcement effect is executed in the state A (low-probability-low base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the effect pending information (preliminary determination result, etc.) stored in S4402 and the preliminary effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52), the preliminary effect (suggestive effect, suggestive display) can be executed (suggestive display execution means). In this embodiment, in the state A (low-probability-low base state), as an executable notice effect using the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, third image display device 72) , It has multiple types of notice effects. In the following, among those forewarning effects, five types of the first to fifth foretelling effects will be described. It should be noted that the notice effect described below includes a notice effect (the change notice) that suggests the possibility that the display result of the currently executed fluctuation display (the change) will be a big hit (the specific display result), and a notice effect (the change notice) that is currently stored. There is a notice effect (holding look-ahead notice) that suggests the possibility that the display result of the variable display executed based on the special figure hold will be a big hit (specific display result).

First, the first notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect suspension displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display section) This is an advance notice effect (also referred to as "effect suspension notice") in the display mode of 9a. This first notice effect (effect pending notice) is executed as a pending prefetch notice. Since the state A is a low-probability-low base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Corresponding to this, in the state A, the hold notice is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the acquired information (first special figure hold) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. It is possible. The control related to the execution of the first notice production (production suspension notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), and the preliminary determination result of the first special figure reservation is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (production control By referring to the effect pending information stored in S4402 by the microcomputer 91), the sub-control side can be recognized.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the present embodiment, the effect suspension notice is given in the display color of the first effect suspension 9a. For this reason, the display color of the first effect suspension 9a is provided with a normal color corresponding to the case where the effect suspension notice is not performed and a notice color corresponding to the case where the effect suspension notice is performed. there is The normal color is one kind of "white", and the notice colors are three kinds of "blue", "green" and "red". The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) determines whether or not to execute the production suspension notice when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (occurrence of the first special figure suspension). , When the determination result to the effect of execution is obtained, the effect pending notice is executed. As a condition for executing the performance suspension notice, for example, at least one first special figure suspension is stored (special figure 1 suspension ball number ≥ 1), and the first special figure suspension stored at that time A predetermined execution lottery is carried out and it can be determined that the lottery will be won when the performance suspension notice is not performed. In addition, the execution condition of the effect suspension notice is not limited to this, for example, it is a condition that two or more first special figure suspensions are stored, or even if the effect suspension notice is performed, further effects A pending notice may be made executable.

When executing the effect suspension notice, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) changes the display color (notice color) of the first effect suspension 9a, that is, the execution pattern of the effect suspension notice (first notice effect pattern ). This determination is made on the basis of an effect pending notice decision table shown in FIG. The sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) selects the first special figure suspension to be the target of the production suspension notice based on the preliminary determination result (production suspension information), and the first special figure suspension is "off Reservation 1", "disconnection reservation 2", "disconnection reservation 3", and "jackpot reservation" are specified, and the display color (first notice effect pattern) of the first effect reservation 9a corresponding to this is specified. , is determined (selected) with reference to the effect pending notice determination table. Here, "off hold 1" is the first special figure hold in which normal variation (disconnection) is performed, "outage suspension 2" is the first special figure suspension in which normal reach variation (disconnection) is performed, and "offset suspension 3" is the first special figure suspension in which the SP reach variation (loss) is performed, and "big hit suspension" is the first special figure suspension in which the big hit variation is performed. In this embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is set to be the highest when the display color of the first effect holding 9a is "red", and the reliability of the big hit is set in the order of "green" and "blue". is set to be low (see FIG. 74(b)). It should be noted that, in addition to the color of the performance suspension, the performance suspension notice can be performed, for example, by the difference in the shape (design) and size of the performance suspension, and each element such as color, shape, and size It is also possible to carry out by a combination of In addition, the execution timing of the performance suspension notice is various timing such as when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (when the first special figure suspension occurs) and during the variable display of the performance pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

The second notice effect is executed by the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the notice effect (also referred to as "number of times display notice") is based on the display mode of the change count image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a. ). As described above, when the effect display such as the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is performed on the first image display device 7 and the sub-background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a , a change number image 710 is displayed (see FIG. 67, etc.). The second notice effect (number of times display notice) uses the fluctuation number image 710 (variation number display), and relates to the variable display of the effect pattern 8 being executed on the first image display device 7. is executed as the change notice suggesting that the possibility of the display result of . . .

The control related to the execution of the second notice effect (number of times display notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). When the secondary background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the number of times display notice ( execution lottery, etc.). Then, when executing the number display notice, by setting the second notice effect pattern (number of times display notice pattern) as the notice effect related to the variable display (S4506), the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. At the same time, it is possible to execute the number of times display notice on the display screen 71a. The number of times display notice is set so that the possibility of execution is higher when the variation display that triggers the execution is SP reach variation (loss) or jackpot variation than when it is normal variation (loss). ing. In this embodiment, the display color of the variation number image 710 is normally set to "white", and the number display notice is given by changing the display color to "red". Note that the mode of advance notice of the number of times display is not limited to the change in the display color of the variation number image 710, and may be, for example, a change in the size, method (arithmetic numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.), position, etc. of the number of times display.

The third notice effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). may be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, this third notice effect is a notice effect with a fireworks motif (also referred to as "fireworks notice"). Along with this, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, and the background of the display screen 71b becomes the background of the starry sky. The color of the fireworks suggests the reliability of the big hit. In this embodiment, four colors of "white", "blue", "green" and "red" are provided as the colors of fireworks. It is set so that the reliability of the big hit decreases in the order of "blue" and "white".

The control related to the execution of the third notice effect (fireworks notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). ), it is possible to execute the fireworks notice in almost the same way. That is, when starting the variable display of the production pattern 8, referring to the first special figure reservation (production reservation information) stored at that time, the type of the first special figure reservation ( For example, the above-mentioned outlier suspension 1 to 3, jackpot suspension, etc.) are specified, and according to the specified type, the color of fireworks is determined (selected) as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern). Along with the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the screen 7a, it is possible to execute a fireworks notice on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a. In this case, the fireworks notice is executed each time the variable display is started until the notice target suspension that triggered the execution of the fireworks notice (holding prefetch notice) is exhausted.

Also, when the fireworks notice is executed as the variable notice, when starting the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 8, refer to the result of determination of whether the variable display to be started, the variation mode (variable effect pattern), etc. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) (S4506), along with the variable display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a It is possible to execute the fireworks notice. The determination (selection) of the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) can be performed, for example, by referring to a firework notice determination table (not shown) as described in the above-mentioned effect suspension notice. .

The fourth notice effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), and may be executed as the change notice or as the pending prefetch notice. This fourth notice effect is, as shown in FIG. 76, a notice effect (also referred to as "chance zone notice") in which characters of "chance zone" and a background are displayed on the display screen 72a. When the zone notice) is executed, it is started with the start of the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, there is one type of effect mode (notice effect pattern) of the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) (character display of the chance zone). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of aspects such as the above-described first notice effect (effect pending notice) and third notice effect (fireworks notice).

The control related to the execution of the fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) is performed by the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91), and when it is executed as a pending prefetch notice, at least the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed. On the condition that two or more first special figure reservations are stored when starting, it is possible to execute the chance zone notice on the display screen 72a along with the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. It's becoming In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold that triggered the execution of the chance zone notice (holding prefetch notice) is consumed. For example, three 1st special figure reservations are stored, and when executing the chance zone notice for the 3rd 1st special figure reservation, the production pattern based on the 3rd 1st special figure reservation The characters "chance zone" continue to be displayed on the display screen 72a until the variable display of No. 8 is executed. Further, when the chance zone notice is executed as the variable notice, when the variable display (variable effect) of the production pattern 8 is started, the fourth notice effect pattern (chance zone notice pattern) is used as the notice effect related to the variable display. By setting (S4506), it is possible to execute the chance zone notice on the display screen 72a along with the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the display screen 7a. Chance zone notice, both when it is executed as a pending preview notice and when it is performed as a change notice, than when the first special figure hold or fluctuation display that triggers the execution is normal fluctuation (out) It is set so that the possibility of execution is higher in the case of SP reach fluctuation (loss) or big hit fluctuation.

The fifth notice effect is executed using all of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). This is executed as the change notice associated with the big hit change. In other words, it is a foretelling performance of a big hit decision. In this embodiment, as a variation display mode (variation pattern) of the production pattern 8 performed as a big hit variation, three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are doubled immediately after the start of the variable display of the production pattern 8. It has a full-rotation performance of performing low-speed fluctuations in a state where all rotation is complete, and the fifth notice performance is a performance ("full-rotation notice") for notifying (suggesting) the execution (occurrence) of the full-rotation performance.

The control related to the execution of the fifth notice effect (full rotation notice) is performed by the sub-control section 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). In the case of a performance mode including a big hit variation and a full rotation performance, by setting the fifth notice performance pattern (full rotation notice pattern) (S4506), it is possible to execute a full rotation notice. In this embodiment, since the full-rotation effect is positioned as a so-called "premium effect", the possibility of executing the full-rotation notice and the full-rotation effect is extremely low.

As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth notice effect (full rotation notice) of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. A character "turn" is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and a character "roll" is displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). A screen 7a (main liquid crystal) and display screens 71a and 72a (sub-liquid crystals) on the left and right of the display screen 7a and positioned outside the game area 3 display the characters "full rotation" on the three display screens. It has become. After a while from the execution of such a full-rotation notice (display of the characters "full-rotation"), the same number of the production pattern is displayed on each of the three display screens one by one. mode) is displayed. That is, when viewed from the front, the display screen 71a (left sub-liquid crystal) on the left side has a left pattern (effect pattern 8L), the central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) has a middle pattern (effect pattern 8C), and the display screen 72a (right sub-liquid crystal) on the right side. The right pattern (production pattern 8R) is displayed with the same number on the liquid crystal). This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. After that, in a state in which the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the three display screens are aligned in parallel, each screen is slowly scrolled from the top to the bottom (“111” to “999” in ascending order). ). Through this scrolling display (full rotation), after any combination of "111" to "999" is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally Then, it is displayed (confirmed display) on the display screen 7a in a jackpot mode.

Each of the above first to fifth notice effects may be executed independently, or multiple notice effects may be executed at the same time on the condition that the image display devices used for executing the notice effects do not overlap. sometimes. As a mode in which a plurality of advance notice effects are executed at the same time, for example, the first notice effect (pending notice of effect) is executed on the first image display device 7, and the second notice effect (display of the number of times) is executed on the second image display device 71. a mode of executing a notice), or executing a third notice effect (fireworks notice) on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71, and executing a fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) on the third image display device. There is a way to do it.

In the above, the notice effect (suggestive effect, suggestive display) that can be executed in the state A has been exemplified. These can also be executed using one or more of the first image display device 7 , the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 . In addition, not only the state A (production modes A, B), but also the first image display device 7, the second It is possible to execute using one or more of the two-image display device 71 and the third-image display device 72 . Furthermore, some or all of the above-described first to fifth advance notice effects may be configured to be executable in state B (production mode E) and state C (production modes C and D).

As described above, while the variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), when the advance notice effect (suggestive effect, suggestive display) related to the variable display is executed, the first image Not only the display device 7 but also the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can perform the advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the advance notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. FIG.

In particular, in this embodiment, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) and the left side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) Image display of one or more of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) located on the right side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) Since it is possible to execute the notice effect by the device, a wide range of display inside and outside the game area 3 is possible. As a result, an impactful announcement effect can be achieved, and the variety of announcement effects can be increased to enhance interest. Among them, in the full-rotation notice (fifth notice effect) that foretells the execution of the full-rotation effect, the three display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a of the first to third image display devices display the characters "full-rotation". After that, the three display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a each display the same number of production patterns one digit at a time, and a full-rotation production is performed in a state in which double eyes are maintained, and one of "111" to "999" After one of the combinations is stopped and displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a, the effect symbols 8 (8L, 8C, and 8R) are finally stopped and displayed (determined display) on the display screen 7a in a jackpot manner. be. As a result, regarding the stop display (display of the stop effect pattern) of the effect pattern 8 mainly performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the stop effect pattern is displayed by increasing the variation of the display of the stop effect pattern. It is possible to increase the interest when playing.

Further, in executing the first to fifth notice effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of notice effects are displayed at the same time (with the same variable display) on the condition that the image display devices to be used do not overlap. It is possible to execute. In this case, since the notice effects of different modes are executed on the respective image display devices, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the notice effects executed in combination. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) and the notice effect are usually executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal, and when a specific change effect or notice effect is executed, the sub Either or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 corresponding to liquid crystal are used. Then, when such a specific variable effect or advance notice effect is not executed, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 display the sub-background, the change frequency image 710, and the effect mode image 720. (see FIG. 67, etc.). In this embodiment, it is possible to display various information on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in addition to the variation count image 710 and the effect mode image 720 .

For example, on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), it is possible to display information about the settings of the gaming machine during a game or while waiting for a customer (during standby). The information related to the settings of the gaming machine includes, for example, the volume of the sound effect (effect sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (brightness) of the display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a, and the appearance rate of the predetermined variable effect and advance notice effect. There is information about the production environment such as In this embodiment, on the left side of the upper surface of the batted ball supply tray 61 (upper tray) (to the left of the first effect button 63a), in addition to the first effect button 63a, an operation means such as an operation lever that can be operated by the player ( (not shown) is provided, and by operating the operation means while waiting for a customer (waiting) or during a game, the above-described information about the production environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It is supposed to be The player can operate the operation means to set the performance environment based on the displayed information according to his/her preference. The operating means provided on the left side of the upper surface of the batted ball supply tray 61 (upper tray) is operated by operating the shooting handle 60 provided on the lower right portion of the front surface of the game machine with the right hand during the game. This is because it is considered normal for the player's right hand to be occupied and his left hand to be free, since the game ball is to be shot by the player. In this way, by using the operation means and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located on the left side of the center of the game machine, the effect environment can be set during the game (shooting handle). It is possible to improve the convenience by enabling the operation related to the setting to be performed without any trouble even during the operation.

Further, for example, on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), while waiting for a customer (during standby), information on specs such as the jackpot probability and probability variable rate (variable probability entry rate) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. It is possible. By displaying information about specs on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51 in this way, for example, for a person who selects a game machine (model) to play in a game hall, , Even if you do not look into the image display device (main liquid crystal) provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area) of the game machine in the customer waiting state (standby state) from the front of the game machine (front), It is possible to check the specifications by just looking at the display screen of the image display device projecting to the side (outside the game area). As a result, it becomes possible to make it easier to select the machine type to play in the game hall. It should be noted that the information about the specifications may be configured to be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

In this way, when the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 do not execute the effect display related to the specific variable effect or the advance notice effect, the display devices (display screens 71a and 72a) display the sub-background and It is possible to perform other displays (predetermined displays) that do not interfere with the effects executed by the first image display device 7, such as the variation count image 710, the effect mode image 720, the information about the settings of the gaming machine, the information about the specs, and the like. It's becoming Thereby, it is possible to effectively utilize the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 .

[Specific reach effect]
Next, a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149, which is one aspect of the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment in terms of specs such as win/fail determination probability and control aspects, so description of this point is omitted. In the specific ready-to-win effect 149, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect (either from the beginning of the ready-to-win effect or during the execution of the ready-to-win effect), the specific effect pattern ("7" in this embodiment) is always displayed. The reach effect is executed. Therefore, when the specific ready-to-win effect 149 is executed and a big win is achieved, the big win pattern of the specific effect pattern is stopped and displayed. Also, a big win (big win type) when this specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win symbol is a big win (specific big win) advantageous to the player. Specifically, in this embodiment, the specific big win is a big win (first specific result) in which the game state after the big win game ends is a low-probability high-base state. Therefore, when the specific ready-to-win effect (thunder reach) 149 occurs, the player can heighten his expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous big win and increase his interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of ready-to-win effects (game effects) with different execution modes (production modes) including a specific reach-to-win effect (thunder reach) 149 as the ready-to-win effects (game effects). ing. In addition, depending on the ready-to-win effect (game effect) to be executed, the possibility that the effect pattern (special pattern) is stopped and displayed in a big win mode (the result of the variable display of the effect pattern becomes a big win), that is, the reliability of the big win is different. It is said that

FIG. 78(a) shows a scene where the variable display of the production pattern 8 is started. In FIG. 78(b), during the execution of the variable display of the same production pattern 8 as in FIG. A scene in reach state is shown. Incidentally, the production pattern "7" is also referred to as a first specific pattern 146 (specific pattern). When the first specific pattern 146 results in a big win ("777"), a big win more advantageous to the player than when the second specific pattern 147 (non-specific pattern) results in a big win (for example, "444") is executed. be done. In addition, when the first specific symbol 146 results in a big win, the big win becomes a big win (first specified result) advantageous to the player who reliably generates a high-probability-low base state after the big-win game is over. On the other hand, when a big win is achieved with the second specific symbol 147, the big win becomes a disadvantageous big win (second specific result) that may not cause a high-probability-low base state after the big-win game is finished.

FIG. 78(c) shows, during the execution of the variable display of the same production pattern 8 as in FIG. ” is executed. As shown in FIG. 78(c), at the upper center of the display screen 7a, a ready-to-win type display section 141 (game effect type display section) indicating the type (name) of the ready-to-win effect to be executed is displayed. is displayed. A character A that performs a predetermined action during Thunder Reach is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. In addition, at the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, a "7" production pattern (first specific pattern 146), which is a ready-to-win pattern (ready-to-win production pattern), is displayed. The ready-to-win pattern (first specific pattern 146), when displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, has a smaller size than when displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 78(b). is displayed.

FIG. 78(d) shows an execution mode of Thunder reach (specific reach effect) during execution of variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78(c). Specifically, it is an effect in which the character A 144 throws the thunder pattern 145 to the medium effect pattern 8L which is displayed in a variable manner, and stabs the lightning pattern 145 into the predetermined medium effect pattern 8L. Then, when the thunder pattern 145 hits the middle effect pattern ("7") which is the same as the ready-to-win pattern (first specific pattern 146), it becomes a big hit, and the middle effect pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern (first specific pattern 146). If you get stabbed, you are out. In FIG. 78(d), the scene where the thunder pattern 145 is stabbed in the middle effect pattern ("7") which is the same as the ready-to-win pattern (first specific pattern 146) (that is, the player is notified of the determination of the big hit). showing.

FIG. 78(e) shows a scene where, as a result of Thunder Reach, the left, middle, and right performance symbols are all stopped at the first specific symbol 146 ("7") (fixed stop display), and a big hit is confirmed. In FIG. 78(f), during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. (ie, a scene in which the player is notified of the omission). In FIG. 78(g), as a result of Thunder Reach, the left and right production patterns are the first specific pattern 146 ("7"), and the middle production pattern is a production pattern ("6") different from the ready-to-win pattern. display), and shows a scene where the deviation is confirmed. Thus, in the specific ready-to-win production 149 (thunder ready-to-win), the production pattern always becomes the ready-to-win mode with the first specific pattern (specific pattern), and the ready-to-win production is executed. When a big win is achieved in the specific reach performance 149 (thunder reach), a big win is always achieved in the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and a relatively advantageous big win is executed for the player.

Next, another execution mode of the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79(a) shows a scene where the variable display of the production pattern 8 is started. In FIG. 79(b), during the execution of the variable display of the same production pattern 8 as in FIG. The middle production pattern continues to be displayed in a variable display), showing a scene in which the reach mode is reached. Incidentally, the production pattern "6" is also referred to as a second specific pattern 147 (specific pattern). When the second specific symbol 147 results in a big win ("666"), there is a possibility that a big win with a lower (disadvantageous) advantage for the player than when the first specific symbol results in a big win. is high. Specifically, a jackpot with a low degree of advantage for the player may always be executed, or the same jackpot as when the jackpot with a low degree of advantage is executed and when the first specific symbol wins the jackpot is executed. There may be cases where it is done.

FIG. 79(c) shows a scene in which "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is executed as the reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79(b). there is As described above, in this embodiment, "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" can be achieved both when the effect pattern 8 is in the reach state with the first specific pattern 146 and when it is in the reach state with the second specific pattern 147. , are executable ready-to-win effects (game effects). However, "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is always the first specific pattern (specific pattern) in the reach mode, and if "Thunder reach (specific reach effect)" results in a big hit, it is always the second One specific pattern (specific pattern) results in a big win, and a relatively advantageous big win is executed for the player.

79(d) to (f) show that the reach symbol ("6") is changed from the second specific symbol 147 ("6") to the second specific symbol 147 ("6") during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79(c). This shows a scene in which a symbol change effect 148 (change effect) that changes to 1 specific symbol 146 ("7") is executed. FIG. 79(d) shows that the left and right ready-to-win patterns ("6") displayed at the first position 142 (first display area) on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are enlarged and shaken and displayed. A scene of moving to a second position 143 (second display area) below the central portion of the screen 7a is shown. By enlarging and displaying the ready-to-win pattern and moving and displaying it to a position closer to the center of the display screen, it is possible to reliably notify (visually recognize) the occurrence of the pattern change effect 148 (the change effect itself) to the player. Become.

FIGS. 79(e) and (f) show an execution mode (drawing mode) in which the pattern change effect 148 changes from the second specific pattern 147 (“6”) to the first specific pattern 146 (“7”). there is FIG. 79(g) shows a scene in which the changed ready-to-win pattern (“7”) is displayed in the enlarged display state at the second position 143 in the pattern change effect 148 . As a result, the player is reliably notified that the ready-to-win pattern in the "thunder reach (specific ready-to-reach effect)" has changed from the second specific pattern 147 ("6") to the first specific pattern 146 ("7"). It becomes possible to As a result, the player is more interested in the game. In addition, in FIG. 79(h), the design change effect 148 is ended, and the ready-to-win pattern ("7") after the change is displayed by moving from the second position 143 to the first position (returning to the original position). It shows a scene in which the pattern is displayed in reduced size (restored to its original size).

After that, the ready-to-win pattern is set to "7" of the first specific pattern 146, and "thunder reach (specific ready-to-win effect)" is started. The execution mode after FIG. 79(h) is the same as that of FIGS. In addition, during the execution of the "thunder reach (specific reach effect)", there may be a time when the left and right effect symbols are displayed only on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. That is, in the specific reach effect, when all the left and right middle effect symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol is displayed on the second display screen 71a outside the game area, and the right effect symbol is displayed on the third display screen outside the game area. and when to display on the display screen 72a. Thus, by displaying part or all of the performance pattern on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a outside the display area, the character performance is made more conspicuous on the display screen 7a, and the specific reach performance is given to the player. can be brought to attention.

Also, in the second embodiment, the specific ready-to-win effect 149 is a game effect that can be executed in a specific game state among a plurality of game states. Specifically, the specific reach effect is a game effect that can be executed in a low probability low base state (normal production mode described later), and other game states (low probability high base state, high probability low base state, high probability high In the base state), the specific reach effect is set not to be executed. That is, the specific ready-to-reach effect in which the character A appears is a game effect that can be executed only in the normal effect mode, and includes a super effect mode (first super effect mode, second super effect mode), first count effect mode, and second super effect mode. It is not executed in the count production mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game by varying the game effect that can be executed in each game state (depending on the effect mode being executed).

[Notice production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81, the advance notice effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, along with the variable display of the production design (special design), the result of the variable display of the production design (special design) becomes a big hit (stop display with the big winning design). (Possibility of execution of jackpot game) is executed. In the second embodiment, there are four types of notice effects (fourth notice effect, fifth notice effect, sixth notice effect, seventh notice effect) shown in FIG. Along with the display, it is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. In addition, these advance notice effects differ in the possibility of executing the big hit game indicated by the notice effect (also referred to as "jackpot reliability"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, it is set to 4th notice effect < 5th notice effect < 6th notice effect < 7th notice effect. 7 The jackpot reliability of the advance notice effect is set to be the highest.

As a result, when the fourth notice performance or the fifth notice performance is executed in accordance with the variable display of the performance symbols, the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, so it is difficult to increase the interest in the game, but the sixth notice performance is not. When the 7th advance notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is relatively high, so it is possible to increase the interest in the game. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the sixth notice effect or the seventh notice effect will be executed as the notice effect during the variable display of the effect symbols.

Specifically, the fourth advance notice effect 151 is a effect mode in which the big hit reliability is set to 2% and a character B152 imitating a boy appears at a predetermined timing. In the fifth advance notice effect 153, the reliability of the big win is set to 4%, and a character C154 resembling a fish appears at a predetermined timing. The sixth notice effect 155 is a effect mode in which the reliability of the big win is set to 33%, and a character D156 imitating a running human silhouette and a character E157 imitating a southern island appear at a predetermined timing. In addition, the sixth notice effect 155 (first game effect) has a jackpot reliability set to 33%, and the fourth notice effect 151 (second game effect) and the fifth notice effect 153 (second game effect). In comparison, it is said to be a notice effect with a high possibility of a big hit.

Character D (specific character) of the plurality of characters (characters D and E) appearing in the sixth advance notice effect 151 represents the specific character in a silhouette form, and a game profit (prize ball) acquisition effect described later is provided. It is a character that also appears in This character D (specific character) commonly appears in a situation where the possibility of being advantageous to the player is relatively high (when the game effect is executed) or in a situation that is advantageous to the player. Character D (specific character) is set to appear in common in a plurality of scenes, but the same character data may be used in common, and the data used differs depending on the scene in which it appears. may be characters having the same shape (appearance from the player's point of view), or may be similar characters having the same shape but different sizes. In addition, other characters (ornaments) may be added to other portions as long as characters of the same shape (including similar shapes) are included. They may also be of different colors. It is sufficient that the characters appearing in a plurality of scenes are similar enough to allow the player to recognize that they are similar characters (all of them are characters in the form of silhouettes of running humans).

In addition, the seventh advance notice effect 158 is a effect mode in which the big hit reliability is set to 45% and a plurality (a large number) of characters F159 imitating birds appear. Incidentally, the seventh notice effect 158 has a big hit reliability set to 45%, and compared with the fourth notice effect 151 and the fifth notice effect 153, it is a notice effect with a considerably high possibility of a big win.

Also, with reference to FIG. 81, the manner in which the fourth advance notice effect 151 to the seventh notice effect 158 are executed will be described. FIG. 70(a) shows a scene where the variable display of the production pattern 8 is started. FIGS. 81(b) to 81(e) are respectively different fluctuation displays. From the scene of FIG. 81(a), through any of FIGS. ) to the reach mode. In addition, since the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the advance notice effect, it is possible that the result of the ready-to-win mode shown in FIG. nature (expectation) is different.

FIG. 81(b) shows a scene in which the character B152 of the fourth advance notice effect 151 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 81(c) shows a scene in which the character C154 of the fifth advance notice effect 153 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as that of FIG. 81(a). FIG. 81(d) shows a scene in which the character D156 and the character E157 of the sixth advance notice effect 155 are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a). there is FIG. 81(e) shows a scene in which the character F159 of the seventh advance notice effect 158 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81(a) in the same variable display as in FIG. 81(a).

[Play profit acquisition effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, the game profit acquisition effect of Example 2 will be described. The game profit acquisition effect is a effect indicating how much the game profit is obtained in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called continuous state (continuous period), and when the low-probability-low base state (state A) becomes a big hit, the game state becomes the low-probability-low base state again. It refers to the state until (excluding the jackpot game state). This is an effect that indicates the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state.

FIG. 82(a) shows a big win (4R first big win) in a low probability/low base state, and a big win game (4R first big win game) relating to the big win is being executed, and is displayed on the round display section 161. As shown, it shows the execution scene of the 4Rth round game, which is the final round ((F) indicates the final round). That is, it is a big hit that occurs in a low probability/low base state (normal state), and is a so-called first hit. Then, the specific state starts from this big win (big win game). In addition, at the lower center of the display screen 7a, there is provided an acquired profit display portion 166 that indicates the amount of game profit (the number of prize balls) acquired in the jackpot game. It is shown that (prize ball) has been paid out (acquired). Incidentally, since the big win shown in FIG. 82(a) is the first big win game in the specific state, the obtained game profit displayed in the obtained profit display section 166 is the total obtained game profit in the specific state (specific period). Become. Accordingly, the earned profit display portion 166 shown in FIG. 82( a ) is also referred to as the total earned profit display portion 164 .

In addition, a big win game effect 163 in which a friend character and an enemy character fight is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a during the big win game. In FIG. 82(a), since an effect is displayed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character, the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to a relatively advantageous game state for the player. It is shown. In addition, in the jackpot game effect, when an effect is displayed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character, the game state after the jackpot game ends is changed to a relatively advantageous game state (high-probability-low base state) for the player. , and the performance of the enemy character defeating the ally character is displayed, the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to a relatively disadvantageous game state (low-probability-high base state) for the player. Also, when shifting to a high-probability-high base state (2R fifth big win, 2R sixth big win), an effect is displayed in which the enemy character defeats the ally character, and the player is told that the game state has temporarily shifted to a disadvantageous game state. , and when the number of variable display times of performance symbols (special symbols) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game, it is notified that the player is in an advantageous state.

FIG. 82(b) shows the ending period after the final round (4th round) of the jackpot game (4R first jackpot game) shown in FIG. 82(a). The display screen 7a indicates that the jackpot game is over, that the game state after the jackpot game is over shifts to a state C (high probability, low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and that the earned game profit in the jackpot game is "00600pt". It has been shown that FIG. 82(c) shows a scene in which the game moves from FIG. 82(b) to state C, and the performance symbols (special symbols) are variably displayed a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 82(c), the specific state (continuous state) continues from FIG. A display is made showing that the total earned gaming profit in the aforementioned jackpot game and the subsequent state C is "650pt". In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the acquired game profit not only during the jackpot game, but also in the state C. A shooting direction display section 162 is provided in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and the shooting direction of the game ball is notified to the player. In addition, an effect for state C is displayed in a predetermined display mode in substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 82(d), after performing the variable display of the predetermined number of performance symbols (special symbols) from FIG. "777") shows a scene in which the display is stopped. FIG. 82(e) shows the second round round game during execution of the jackpot game (15R third jackpot game) related to the jackpot shown in FIG. 82(d). At the upper center of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display section 164 showing the total earned gaming profit in a specific state (specific period) is provided. An acquired profit display section 166 is provided to indicate the current acquired game profit in the third jackpot game. Also, in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect 163 is displayed in which a friend character and an enemy character are fighting.

FIG. 82(f) shows a scene in which the round game progresses to the 15th round, which is the final round, in the same jackpot game as in FIG. 82(e). The display of the earned profit display section 166 increases to "02050pt", and accordingly the display of the total earned profit display section 164 increases to "02750pt". In addition, since the effect for the final round of the jackpot game is displayed in which the friend character defeats the enemy character, the game state after the jackpot game is relatively advantageous to the player (state C, high probability) is displayed. The player is indicated to transition to the low base state).

FIG. 83(g) shows the ending period after the final round (15 rounds) of the jackpot game (15R third jackpot game) shown in FIG. 82(f). The display screen 7a indicates that the jackpot game is over, that the game state after the jackpot game is over shifts to a state C (high probability and low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and that the jackpot game (15R third jackpot game) It shows that the earned gaming profit was "02200pt" and that the total earned gaming profit in the specific state was "02900pt". FIG. 83(h) shows a scene in which the state is shifted from FIG. 83(g) to state C, and the performance symbols (special symbols) are variably displayed for a predetermined number of times. In FIG. 83(h), the specific state (continuous state) continues from FIG. A display is made, showing that the total earned gaming profit in the above-described multiple jackpot games and the state C executed in the meantime is "03500pt".

FIG. 83(i) is after execution of the variable display of the predetermined number of performance symbols (special symbols) from FIG. This shows a scene where the result of the variable display is a big win and the big win pattern ("777") is stopped. Also in FIG. 83(i), the specific state (continuous state) continues from FIG. 82(a). FIG. 83(j) shows the execution scene of the 12th round game during execution of the jackpot game (15R third jackpot game) related to the jackpot shown in FIG. 83(i). The display of the earned profit display section 166 becomes "01850pt", and the display of the total earned profit display section 164 increases to "09950pt".

FIG. 83(k) is the same 12th round in the same jackpot game as FIG. 83(j), and shows a scene after a predetermined time has passed from FIG. 83(j). As shown in FIG. 83(k), the acquired game profit in the jackpot game being executed is "01900pt", thereby showing the scene where the total acquired game profit in the specific state is "10000pt". In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the fact that the total earned gaming profit is "10000pt" is a standard that the specific state continues for a long period of time and that a large amount of gaming profits (prize balls) have been obtained. That is, the situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, a specific profit display section 167 is provided in substantially the center of the display screen 7a in order to indicate the advantageous situation to the player.

A specified profit display unit 167 is provided in response to the acquired profit displayed on the total acquired profit display unit 164 becoming "10000pt", and the specified profit display unit 167 displays when the amount of the total acquired gaming profit exceeds the specified amount. "10000ptOVER" is displayed to indicate that the specified amount has been reached. Further, the specific profit display portion 167 displays the character D156 (specific character) together with the display of "10000ptOVER". As a result, the fact that the player was able to obtain a large amount of game profit while the specific state (continuous state) continued, that is, the fact that "10000 points" was obtained as the obtained profit is an advantageous situation for the player. is easily recognizable.

As described above, the character D156 (specific character) is a character used as a foretelling effect with a relatively high degree of reliability for big hits, and its display mode also resembles the silhouette of a running human being similar to the foretelling effect. Due to the display mode, the player can easily recognize that they are similar characters. In this way, by using a character similar to the character (specific character) used in the game effect with high reliability of the big hit, the current game situation, that is, the situation in which the game profit of "10000ptOVER" is obtained, is very convenient for the player. It is possible to easily grasp that it is in an advantageous situation. Also, although all characters appearing in the sixth advance notice effect 155 may be used, only the character D is used as a common character in this embodiment. That is, it is sufficient if at least some characters are common in both scenes.

In addition, in order to make the player recognize the display mode ("10000pt OVER" and the specific character) of the specific profit display section 167, the display mode ("10000pt OVER" and the specific character) is displayed for a specific time ("4s" in this embodiment) after the total earned gaming profit reaches 10000pt. ) continue to display. In the meantime, even if the display of the total earned profit display section 164 exceeds "T: 10000pt", the display mode of the specific profit display section 167 is maintained as "10000ptOVER" (the display of the specific character continues in the same way). do). In addition, in order to make the player recognize the display mode of the specific profit display section 167 with certainty, the profit amount displayed in the specific profit display section 167 (“10000pt”) is changed to the profit amount displayed in the total earned profit display section 164 ( "10000pt") in a larger size. Also, the amount of profit (“10000pt”) displayed in the specific profit display portion 167 is displayed in a size larger than the amount of profit (“01900pt”) displayed in the earned profit display portion 166 .

In addition, the specific amount ("10000" pt) that triggers the display of the specific profit display part 167 is set to an amount that cannot be obtained in one big win game even in a jackpot game that can obtain the most game profit. . In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to increase the acquired game profit even in the state C, one big win game and the state C continue for a long period of time (that is, by generating a small win game many times) Although it is also possible to obtain a specific amount of game profit, usually, a specific amount of game profit is obtained by generating a jackpot game a plurality of times. Therefore, although it is impossible to obtain a specific amount of game profit only from the game profit obtained from one big win game, it is impossible to obtain a specific amount of game profit by generating a plurality of big win games. It can be said that it is possible.

Also, in FIG. 83(k), the case where the amount of the total earned game profit exceeds the specific amount ("10000pt") during the jackpot game has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, it is not during the jackpot game, but in a specific state and in a state other than the jackpot game (high-probability-low base state, high-probability-high base state, low-probability-high base state) total acquisition The amount of game profit may exceed a specific amount (“10000pt”). FIG. 83(l) shows such a scene, when the game state after the end of the big win game is in the state C, the amount of the total earned game profit is reduced to a specific amount ("10000pt") by the occurrence of the small win game. It shows a scene that goes beyond As shown in FIG. 83(l), a total earned profit display section 164 is provided at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and "T: 10000pt" is displayed, indicating that the total earned gaming profit is "10000pt". It is shown that.

Further, in accordance with this, a specific profit display section 167 is provided in substantially the center of the display screen 7a, as in FIG. 83(k). Then, the specific profit display section 167 displays "10000ptOVER" indicating that the amount of the total earned gaming profit exceeds the specific amount (becomes the specific amount). Further, the specific profit display portion 167 displays the character D156 (specific character) together with the display of "10000ptOVER". As a result, the fact that the player was able to obtain a large amount of game profit while the specific state (continuous state) continued, that is, the fact that "10000 points" was obtained as the obtained profit is an advantageous situation for the player. is easily recognizable. In addition, even when the total earned gaming profit is "10000pt" in the state C, the player is made to recognize the display mode ("10000ptOVER" and the specific character) of the specific profit display section 167 as in the case of the jackpot game. Therefore, the display is continued for a specific time ("4s" in this embodiment) from the time when the total earned gaming profit reaches 10000pt.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by displaying a common character in a plurality of advantageous situations, the situation where the reliability of the big win is high, the situation where a large amount of game profit can be obtained, etc. It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of characters (specific characters) that appear in situations advantageous to the player. In addition, by causing the specific character to appear in a plurality of advantageous situations in this way, a player who sees the specific character in one scene can, based on the previous experience of seeing the specific character in the advantageous situation, understand the situation in the other scene. When looking at the specific character in , it is possible to intuitively recognize that the current situation may be an advantageous situation. In this way, in a gaming machine equipped with a wide variety of game effects, by causing a specific character to appear in an appropriate scene, it is possible to efficiently convey to the player what the game effects mean (reliability for big hits, degree of advantage, etc.). It is possible to inform (recognize) This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the gaming machine and increase their interest in the game.

[Transition mode of production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the performance mode (performance aspect) executed in each game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the types of big wins and the types of game states to be shifted after the end of big wins are the same as those in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6, etc.). The game state in the initial state after the power is turned on is the low-probability-low base state, and the production mode is set to "normal production mode 181" shown in FIG. 86(a). A means for setting a predetermined production mode from a plurality of production modes is also called "production mode setting means". In the second embodiment, the “production mode setting means” is provided in the sub-controller 90 .

During the execution of the game (special symbol success/failure determination, special symbol/performance symbol fluctuation display, etc.) in the normal production mode (low-probability base state), the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) is a big hit. Then, the big-hit special symbol (big-hit performance symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the big-hit game is executed. In addition, as described in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment as well, in the low-probability base state, the game ball is shot to the left gaming area to display the variation of the first special symbol (first special symbol right or wrong determination) In the high-probability high base state, high-probability low base state, and low-probability high base state, the game ball is fired into the right game area to display the second special symbol fluctuation (second special It is a game property mainly based on design propriety judgment).

The big hits as a result of the first special symbol propriety determination that can occur in the normal production mode (low probability/low base state) are the 4R first big hit and the 4R second big hit. When the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is the 4R first jackpot, at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50% of the 4R first jackpot), when the jackpot hits or/and during the jackpot game. In addition, there is a "first bonus (4R first jackpot game)" that informs (suggests) the player that the production mode (game state) after the big hit game will be the super production mode (high-probability-low base state). executed. When the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state will shift to a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security. It becomes possible. That is, when the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed along with the big win game, the super effect mode (high probability/low base state) is always entered after the big win game ends. Incidentally, there are two types (plural types) of effects in the super effect mode shown in FIGS. 86(b) and (c).

In addition, the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first jackpot (remaining ratio, for example, 50% when the 4R first jackpot is reached), and the 4R second jackpot When it becomes, "2nd bonus (4R first jackpot game)" is executed. In the second bonus (second bonus effect), the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shifts to the count effect mode (low-probability base state) when the big win or/and during the big win game. An effect for informing (suggesting) the player that the game is to be performed is performed. However, even when the second bonus is executed, if the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is the 4R first jackpot, the effect mode after the end of the big win game is not the count effect mode. , Transition to super production mode (high probability low base state). It should be noted that the effect mode of the count effect mode (first count effect mode) that can shift from the first special symbol suitability determination is the mode shown in FIG. 86(d).

That is, when the second bonus (second bonus effect) is executed along with the big hit game, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is transferred to the super effect mode (high-probability-low base state) ( 4R first big hit) and transition to count effect mode (low probability high base state) (4R second big hit). Further, when shifting from the second bonus to the super performance mode, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by performing a promotion performance indicating that the mode is to be shifted to the super performance mode during the big win game or at the end of the big win game. . Therefore, even when the second bonus performance is executed, the player expects the occurrence of the promotion performance and can maintain high game interest for a long period of time without losing the expectation for the advantageous game state. becomes.

In the super performance mode executed in the high-probability-low base state, a plurality of performance modes are provided in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the player selects one of the performance modes at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game or the like. It can be selected using the production button (see FIG. 86(f)). In addition, as selectable production modes, a first super production mode 182 (first production mode, specific production mode) and a second super production mode 183 are provided. During the execution of these super production modes, the game state is set to a high-probability-low base state, and as described in the first embodiment, a game capable of increasing the amount of acquired game profit by a small winning game. It is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Also, the super performance mode (high-probability-low base state) continues until the next big hit (first bonus, third bonus, or fourth bonus) occurs.

When the first count performance mode (count performance mode, second performance mode) executed in the low probability high base state does not become a big hit until the fluctuation display of the special pattern (performance pattern) of the predetermined number of times (100 times) is completed. , the game state shifts to the normal production mode. As a result, the game state shifts from the low-probability-high base state to the low-probability-low base state (the most disadvantageous game state for the player). As described above, in the super production modes 182 and 183 (high probability low base state) and the first count production mode (low probability high base state), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes a time saving state, and the game ball in the right game area is fired, and the game property is mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is appropriate).

Then, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the 15R third big hit, the "third bonus (15R third big win game)" is executed. be. This third bonus is the most advantageous jackpot for the player, in which the game profit that can be obtained is the largest and the game state after the jackpot game is finished is set to the super performance mode. Therefore, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state (super effect mode, high-probability-low base state) advantageous to the player will be reached after the big win game. Therefore, it is possible to play games with a sense of security. That is, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed along with the big win game, the super effect mode (high probability/low base state) is always entered after the big win game ends.

In addition, in the super production mode 182, 183 or the first count production mode, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the 4R fourth jackpot, the "first bonus (4R fourth jackpot game)" is executed. be. Since the 4R fourth jackpot game and the 4R second jackpot game are similar jackpot games (the number of times the jackpot is opened, the opening time, etc.), the first bonus effect of the same effect mode is executed. Further, as described above, the first bonus effect allows the player to easily recognize that the game state will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security.

Also, in the super performance mode 182, 183 or the first count performance mode, the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is the 2R fifth big win, the 2R sixth big win, the 2R seventh big win, or the 2R eighth big win. In this case, "fourth bonus (2R fifth jackpot game, 2R sixth jackpot game, 2R seventh jackpot game, or 2R eighth jackpot game)" is executed. In the fourth bonus (fourth bonus effect), when the big hit occurs or/and during the big win game, the effect mode (game state) after the big win game shifts to the count effect mode (low probability high base state). An effect for informing (suggesting) the player that the game is to be performed is performed. However, even when the fourth bonus is executed, if the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is the 2R fifth big win or the 2R sixth big win, the effect mode after the end of the big win game is Although it shifts to the count performance mode (second count performance mode) once, when the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern) passes a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if there is no big hit during that time), the performance The mode shifts to the super production mode (high-probability-low base state). That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the high-probability-high base state, then the game state shifts to the high-probability-low base state, and the effect mode shifts to the super effect mode.

On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is the 2R seventh jackpot or the 2R eighth jackpot, the production mode after the end of the big hit game shifts to the count production mode (second count production mode). Then, when the variable display of the special design (performance design) passes a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) (if there is no big hit during that time), the performance mode shifts to the normal performance mode (low-probability-low base state). do. That is, the count effect mode (second count effect mode) is executed in the low-probability-high base state, then the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state, and the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode. It should be noted that the effect mode of the count effect mode (second count effect mode) that can shift from the second special symbol suitability determination is the mode shown in FIG. 86(e).

In addition, in the super performance mode, when the fourth bonus (2R fifth big win, 2R sixth big win, 2R seventh big win, or 2R eighth big win) is achieved, the second count effect is always performed after the big win game. The fourth bonus is regarded as a disadvantageous big win compared to the first and second bonuses because of the transition to the mode (and also because the amount of game profit that can be obtained is small). Conversely, the third bonus and the first bonus are regarded as advantageous jackpots because after the jackpot game, the player always shifts to the super mode (the amount of game profit that can be obtained is also large, especially the third bonus is large). .

Here, the first count effect mode 184 that shifts based on the result of the first special symbol propriety determination shifts only to the normal effect mode based on the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, the second count production mode 185 that shifts based on the result of the second special design propriety determination is based on the variable display of the special design (production design) of a predetermined number of times, when shifting to the normal production mode 181 , and a case of shifting to the super effect mode 182, 183.

On the other hand, the effect modes of the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 both display the common effect mode name “count mode” on the effect mode display section 171, and the background character 172 is also displayed. It shows a common character (cloud background). The difference is that different images (display sections) are provided in the partial area of the display screen 7a. Specifically, in the second count effect mode 185, a remaining count display portion indicating the remaining period of the count effect mode is provided on the upper right of the display screen 7a. In that the first count effect mode 184 is not provided with such a display part, the display modes of both effect modes are different. In this way, since the difference in display mode between the two production modes is slight, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the production modes. As a result, even in the first count presentation mode 184, the player expects the transition to the super mode to maintain a high interest in the game for a long period of time, or when the second count presentation mode 185 shifts to the super mode. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player and increase the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the bonus effect and the effect mode shown in FIG. 84 are executed according to the transition of the game state, thereby diversifying and diversifying the game effect and preventing boredom of the game. To make it possible to heighten a game interest.

[Game production in each production mode]
Next, game effects (ready-to-win effects and character effects) executed in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, normal production mode 181 (third production mode), first super production mode 182 (first production mode, specific production mode), second super production mode 183, count production mode (second production mode, The first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185) have game effects with different effect modes (display modes). In addition, in the normal production mode 181, 4 types (plurality) of game effects (ready-to-win effects) can be executed, and jackpot reliability is set for each of these 4 types of game effects. The big hit reliability indicates the possibility that the performance pattern (special pattern) variably displayed together with the game performance is stopped and displayed as the big win pattern when the corresponding game performance (for example, Thunder Reach) is executed. That is, it indicates the possibility of a big win (first bonus or second bonus) (possibility of executing a big win game).

In addition, each game effect executed in the normal effect mode mainly for determining whether the first special symbol is right or wrong can have different characters appear, character S in S reach, character T in T reach, character A in Thunder reach ( See FIGS. 78(c), (d), etc.), the character Y appears in full rotation reach. By looking at these appearing characters and presentation modes, the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big hit of the game presentation to be executed. Of course, other common or different characters may be displayed (appear) in addition to the characters shown in FIG. 85 in these game effects.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85, different game effects can be executed in the first super effect mode 182, the second super effect mode 183, and the count effect modes 184 and 185, which are mainly concerned with the second special symbol suitability determination. Here, the reliability of the game production in these production modes is referred to as "advantageous jackpot reliability". This is different from mere "jackpot reliability", and is the possibility of an advantageous jackpot, that is, the third bonus or the first bonus that the super mode continues (the possibility of the 15R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot). ). In the super performance mode, the game profit that can be obtained is small, and the big win in which the performance mode after the end of the big win game shifts to the count performance mode is a big win that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the current situation) even if it is a big win. Since it is a jackpot), the “advantageous jackpot reliability” indicates the possibility of an advantageous jackpot excluding these disadvantageous jackpots.

Specifically, the character A confrontation reach 191 that can be executed in the first super production mode 182 is a game production in which the character X and the character A appear and face each other, and the advantageous jackpot reliability is the first super production. It is the lowest "1%" among the game effects that can be executed in the mode 182.例文帳に追加That is, when the character A confrontation ready-to-win 191 is executed in the first super effect mode 182, the possibility that the change display of the effect symbol will result in a big hit is very low. Therefore, when the character A confrontation ready-to-win 191 is executed, rather than expecting a big win, the player expects that a disadvantageous jackpot will not occur, that is, expects that the result of the special symbol suitability determination will be a failure. conduct.

The character G confrontation reach 192 is a game effect in which the character X and the character G appear and face each other, and the advantage jackpot reliability is "10%". The character H confrontation reach 193 is a game production in which the character X and the character H appear and face each other, and the advantage jackpot reliability is set to "30%". The character I confrontation reach 194 is a game production in which the character X and the character I appear and face each other, and the advantage jackpot reliability is the highest among the game productions that can be executed in the first super production mode 182. It is said to be “50%” of Also, in the confrontation reach described above, if the ally character X defeats the enemy character A, G, H, or I, an advantageous big hit is achieved. If the player loses, it becomes a disadvantageous jackpot, and if the player wins, the result of the special symbol suitability determination is lost, and the game state continues. Also, the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 shall execute a common game effect. As a result, it becomes more difficult to determine which count effect mode it is. In addition, in each production mode, game effects other than those defined in FIG.

[Production aspect of each production mode]
FIG. 86(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the normal effect mode 181. FIG. In the normal presentation mode 181, as the background character 172, characters imitating mountains and trees are displayed. Incidentally, in the normal effect mode, the effect mode display section 171 indicating that the normal effect mode is not provided. Therefore, since there is no background character or the production mode display section 171, it is understood that it is the normal production mode. FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first super effect mode 182 when the player selects the first super effect mode 182 out of the super effect modes. A background character 172 representing the sun is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "first super mode" is displayed on the performance mode display section 171 to indicate to the player the performance mode to be executed. there is

Also, FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the second super effect mode 183 when the player selects the second super effect mode 183 out of the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the moon is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying "second super mode" on the presentation mode display section 171, the presentation mode to be executed is indicated to the player. there is Also, FIG. 86(d) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the first count effect mode 184 when the effect mode is set to the first count effect mode 184. FIG. A cloud-like character is displayed as the background character 172 on the display screen 7a, and the effect mode to be executed is indicated to the player by displaying "count mode" in the effect mode display section 171.例文帳に追加

Moreover, FIG.86(e) is a figure which shows the effect|presentation aspect of the said 2nd count effect|presentation mode 185 when the effect|presentation mode is set to the 2nd count effect|presentation mode 185. FIG. On the display screen 7a, the same cloud character as in the first count effect mode 184 is displayed as the background character 172, and the same "count mode" as in the first count effect mode 184 is also displayed in the effect mode display section 171. It is carried out. This indicates the effect mode to be executed for the player. Further, a remaining count display portion 173, which is different from the first count effect mode 184, is provided on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and indicates the remaining period of the second count effect mode 185. - 特許庁While the execution period of the first count effect mode 184 is a period in which the number of variable displays of special symbols is fixed at 100 times, the execution period of the second count effect mode 185 is a period in which the number of variable displays of special symbols is 50. It has a plurality of periods of 100 times and 100 times. Therefore, in the second count effect mode 185, such a display section is provided in order to clearly indicate the remaining period to the player, or to enhance the interest in the game by performing an effect to increase the remaining period. Such a difference in display mode is the difference between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, and other configurations, appearing characters, executable game effects, etc. are common.

In addition, in FIG. 86(f), when the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, the player can select any effect mode from the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183. A production mode selection screen 186 is shown. A production mode selection period is provided at a predetermined time during the jackpot game before the production mode is set to the super production mode (similar to the first embodiment).

[Game production in specific production mode]
Next, using FIG. 87, among the plurality of production modes possessed by the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, a game production (reach production, A description will be given of the effect mode (execution mode) of the character effect). When the game state is set to the high-probability-low base state, any one of the plurality of production modes (first super production mode, second super production mode) is selected by the player's production button operation (selection by the player). It is possible to select the production mode. As described above, these production modes differ in game production depending on the production mode to be executed. Therefore, the player can select an arbitrary performance mode or switch to a different performance mode according to his/her preference, thereby preventing boredom of the game and increasing the interest in the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 87, etc., in the first super effect mode 182, a game effect is executed in a characteristic effect mode different from the other effect modes. Specifically, four types (plurality) of game effects (reach effects) of character A confrontation reach, character G confrontation reach, character H confrontation reach, and character I confrontation reach (collectively referred to simply as "confrontation reach") ) is executable. In these game effects, an ally character (character X) and an enemy character (characters A, G, H, or I) face each other, and depending on the result of the confrontation, whether the result of the confrontation is advantageous to the player. It shows what That is, it indicates whether or not to execute a jackpot game (first bonus or third bonus) that is advantageous to the player whose game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the super performance mode depending on the game effect to be executed.

Further, in each game presentation, an option display section 179 indicating the result of the confrontation is provided on the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the result of the confrontation is one of the results displayed in the option display section 179. There are three types of options displayed in the option display section 179: [Victory], [Continue], and [Loss]. win] is displayed), a big win advantageous to the player is achieved, the third bonus or the first bonus (big win game) is executed, and the performance mode after the big win game is finished is set to the super performance mode. Incidentally, the game state in the super effect mode is a high-probability-low base state that is advantageous to the player.

When the result of the confrontation reach becomes [Continue] (when [Continue] is displayed in the result display section 178), the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, and the big hit game is not executed. The first super performance mode continues even after the end of the confrontation reach. After that, the variable display of the special symbols (effect symbols) is continuously executed in the first super effect mode. When the result of the confrontation ready-to-win is [Loss] (when [Loss] is displayed on the result display section 178), a big win disadvantageous to the player occurs, the fourth bonus (big win game) is executed, and the big win game ends. The subsequent effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. - 特許庁In addition, as described above, the game state in the second count effect mode has a low probability high base state and a high probability low base state.

In addition, a plurality of game effects are set in the first super effect mode 185, and among these game effects, the game effect in which the option of [defeat] can be displayed on the option display section 179 is an enemy character. Only character A confrontation reach 191 (first special game effect) in which character A appears is provided. That is, in the situation where the game is executed in the first super production mode 185, the production mode being executed is shifted from the first super production mode 185 to the second count production mode 185 without going through the character A showdown reach 191. never do. Therefore, in the first super performance mode 185 in the high-probability-low base state, when the 2R seventh and 2R eighth big wins are unfavorable to the player, the character A confrontation ready-to-win 191 is always executed. Incidentally, even when the 2R fifth big win and the 2R sixth big win, which can be promoted from the second count production mode to the super production mode, the character A confrontation ready-to-win 191 is always executed. That is, when the fourth bonus (see FIG. 84) is executed in the first super production mode and the production mode after the jackpot game ends shifts to the second count production mode, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed.

FIG. 87(a) shows a scene in which a character A showdown ready-to-win effect 191 (first special game effect) is executed with the variable display of predetermined effect symbols in the first super effect mode 185. FIG. A background character 172 representing the sun is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a to indicate that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185. FIG. Also, in the substantially central portion of the display screen, a character X174 as an ally character and a character A144 as an enemy character are displayed to face each other in confrontation reach. In addition, on the left and right upper parts of the display screen, the production pattern of the ready-to-win mode is displayed (left and right production patterns "2" constituting the ready-to-win mode are displayed). In addition, an option display section 179 is provided in the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the results of the confrontation ready-to-win are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the character A showdown ready-to-win effect, [continue] and [defeat] are displayed as options in the option display section.

In the character A showdown ready-to-win effect (first special game effect) of the second embodiment, [Loss] is always displayed as an option. Also, [Win] is not displayed as an option. Therefore, the character A confrontation ready-to-reach effect is a ready-to-reach effect showing a considerably disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, the player expects that [Continue] will be displayed on the result display section 178, that is, that the result of the special symbol suitability determination will be a failure and that the first super effect mode will continue. Also, although not shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, although [win] is not displayed as an option, after [defeat] is displayed as a result of the confrontation, a reversal effect is executed to give an advantage to the player. It also has a production that makes it a big hit.

As another aspect of the second embodiment, in the character A showdown ready-to-win effect (first special game effect), the option of [win] may be displayed or [defeat] may not be displayed. Also, even if you display three options of [Victory], [Continue], and [Defeat], or display only one option (in this case, confirm with the displayed option) good.

FIG. 87(b) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87(a), and shows a scene in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character A confrontation ready-to-reach effect. ing. In addition, in the central part of the display screen, a winning ready-to-win effect pattern [232] is displayed, indicating that the ready-to-win effect resulted in losing. In addition, the characters [Draw] are displayed to indicate that the confrontation between the character X and the character A ended in a draw. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues thereafter without ending the first super effect mode (fourth bonus is executed and shifting to the second count effect mode). In other words, it indicates that the character A showdown ready-to-win effect is executed when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out.

FIG. 87(c) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87(a), and shows a scene in which [Loss] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character A confrontation ready-to-reach effect. ing. In addition, in the central part of the display screen, a winning ready-to-win effect pattern [212] is displayed, indicating that the ready-to-win effect did not lead to an advantageous big win for the player. In addition, as the production pattern, the off-reach production pattern of [212] (the production pattern that is not the same in three digits) is displayed, but the result of the special design propriety judgment is a big hit (2R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, 2R 7th big hit or 2R 8th big hit). In the confrontation between the character X and the character A, an effect is displayed indicating that the character A has won (the character X has been defeated). This indicates that the first super effect mode is terminated (the fourth bonus is executed and the game shifts to the second count effect mode). That is, when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a disadvantageous jackpot (2R fifth jackpot, 2R sixth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot, or 2R eighth jackpot) that is relatively unfavorable to the player, the character A showdown ready-to-win performance is executed. indicates that

As mentioned above, when the character A showdown ready-to-win production is executed and [defeat] is displayed in the result display section, in principle (in most cases), the fourth bonus is executed and the second count production mode is entered. Transition. However, in rare cases (with a very low possibility), there is a case where a reversal effect is executed after the defeat effect of FIG. In this case, the 3rd bonus (or the 1st bonus) is executed, and then the super effect mode is entered. In the table of FIG. 85, the reason why the advantageous jackpot reliability of character A confrontation reach is not 0% but 1% is that there is such a rare case. Further, instead of such a mode, the advantage big hit reliability in the case where the character A showdown ready-to-win production is executed may be set to 0%.

FIG. 87(d) shows a scene in which a character G showdown ready-to-win effect 192 (second special game effect) is executed with the variable display of predetermined effect symbols in the first super effect mode 185. FIG. A background character 172 representing the sun is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a to indicate that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185. FIG. Also, in the substantially central portion of the display screen, a character X174 as an ally character and a character G192 as an enemy character, which are to face each other in confrontation reach, are displayed. In addition, on the left and right upper parts of the display screen, the production pattern of the ready-to-win mode is displayed (left and right production patterns "2" constituting the ready-to-win mode are displayed). In addition, an option display section 179 is provided in the upper part of the display screen, and options that can be the results of the confrontation ready-to-win are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87(d), in the character G showdown reach production (second special game production), unlike the character A showdown reach production (first special game production), the options in the option display section are [win] and [continue]. ] is displayed and [Defeat] is not displayed.

That is, in the character G confrontation ready-to-win effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is never displayed as an option. Also, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character G showdown ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect that indicates a considerably advantageous situation for the player (no disadvantageous jackpot as a result of the game effect). Therefore, the player expects that [Win] is displayed on the result display section 178, that is, that the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is an advantageous jackpot, and that the first super effect mode continues after the jackpot game ends. and play the game. Further, even if [Win] is not displayed and [Continue] is displayed, the first super effect mode continues thereafter, so the player can play the game with a sense of security. . Also, although not shown in the figure, it may have a pattern of displaying only [Win] (one option).

FIG. 87(e) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87(d), and shows a scene in which [Victory] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character G confrontation ready-to-reach effect. ing. In addition, a hit (advantageous big win) ready-to-win effect pattern [222] is displayed in the central part of the display screen, indicating that a win (advantageous big win) has been achieved as a result of the ready-to-win effect. Also, an effect image is displayed showing that the character X, which is an ally character, has won against the character G, which is an enemy character. This indicates that an advantageous jackpot is achieved, a jackpot game (third bonus or first bonus) is executed, and the first super effect mode is set again after the jackpot game ends. That is, it indicates that the character G showdown ready-to-win effect is executed when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is an advantageous jackpot (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot).

Also, FIG. 87(f) shows a scene after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 87(d), in which [Continue] is displayed in the result display section as the result of the confrontation of the character G confrontation ready-to-reach effect. is shown. In addition, in the central part of the display screen, a winning ready-to-win effect pattern [232] is displayed, indicating that the ready-to-win effect resulted in losing. In addition, the characters [Draw] are displayed to indicate that the confrontation between the character X and the character G was a draw. This indicates that the first super effect mode continues thereafter without ending the first super effect mode (fourth bonus is executed and shifting to the second count effect mode). In other words, it indicates that the character G showdown ready-to-win effect is executed when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is "off".

FIG. 87(g) shows a scene in which a character H confrontation ready-to-win effect 193 (second special game effect) is executed with the variable display of predetermined effect symbols in the first super effect mode 185. FIG. Also, in substantially the center of the display screen, a friendly character character X174 and an enemy character character H176, which will face each other in confrontation reach, are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the option display section 179 displays [Victory] and [Continue] as options in the same manner as in the character G showdown ready-to-reach effect, but does not display [Loss]. .

That is, in the character H confrontation ready-to-reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is never displayed as an option, similarly to the character G confrontation ready-to-reach effect. Also, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character H showdown ready-to-win effect (second special game effect) is a ready-to-win effect showing a considerably advantageous situation for the player (no disadvantageous jackpot as a result of the game effect). Also, although illustration is omitted, if the result of the character H confrontation ready-to-win effect is [win], as in FIG. 87(e) or FIG. The performance mode is set again, and when [Continue] is set, the first super performance mode is continued without executing the big winning game.

FIG. 87(h) shows a scene in which a character I confrontation ready-to-win effect 194 (second special game effect) is executed along with the variable display of predetermined effect symbols in the first super effect mode 185 . Also, in the substantially central part of the display screen, a character X174 as an ally character and a character I177 as an enemy character, which are to face each other in confrontation reach, are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 87(h), in the option display section 179, [Victory] and [Continue] are displayed as options in the same manner as in the character G showdown ready-to-reach effect, and [Loss] is not displayed. .

That is, in the character I confrontation ready-to-reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option, as in the character G confrontation ready-to-reach effect. Also, [Win] is always displayed as an option. Accordingly, the ready-to-win effect of the character I confrontation (second special game effect) is also a ready-to-win effect showing a considerably advantageous situation for the player (no disadvantageous jackpot as a result of the game effect). Also, although illustration is omitted, if the result of the character I confrontation ready-to-win effect is [win], as in FIG. 87(e) or FIG. The performance mode is set again, and when [Continue] is set, the first super performance mode is continued without executing the big winning game.

As described above, in the first super production mode (first production mode, specific production mode), when any of the character G showdown reach production, the character H showdown reach production, and the character I showdown reach production is executed, [Loss] is never displayed as an option, and as a result, [Loss] is never displayed in the result display area. That is, in the first super production mode, only the character A showdown ready-to-win production has the possibility of becoming a disadvantageous jackpot disadvantageous to the player, and other game productions (character G showdown) excluding the character A showdown ready-to-win production The ready-to-win effect, the character H confrontation ready-to-reach effect, and the character I confrontation ready-to-reach effect) do not have the possibility of becoming a disadvantageous jackpot unfavorable to the player.

As a result, when a game performance (second special game performance) other than the character A showdown ready-to-play performance is executed, the possibility of a disadvantageous jackpot at that time is eliminated, the player's sense of security is enhanced, and the character A showdown is performed. It is possible to heighten expectations for an advantageous big win when a game effect (second special game effect) other than the ready-to-win effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 85, the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, and the character I confrontation reach effect are different in the possibility of becoming an advantageous big win reliability (advantageous big win reliability). Confrontation reach production is the most advantageous jackpot reliability is set high.

In addition, there is an option of [Continue] that does not result in a disadvantageous big win even when the character A confrontation ready-to-win performance is executed, and there is also a small possibility of an advantageous big win. As a result, the sense of tension for the disadvantageous big win when the character A confrontation ready-to-win performance (first special game performance) is executed is heightened to heighten the amusement of the game, as well as the continuation of the first super performance mode and the expectation for the advantageous big win. can be maintained for a long period of time.

In addition, in the first super production mode, the value of character A (specific character) in the first super production mode is set low by making the game production in which character A appears the most disadvantageous game production for the player. ing. On the other hand, as described above, the "specific ready-to-win effect", which is a game effect that can be executed in the normal effect mode and in which character A appears in common with the character A confrontation ready-to-win effect, has a relatively high hit reliability. At the same time, if a big hit is achieved, the game performance is set such that an advantageous big win is guaranteed (high-probability-low base state and super performance mode are set).

That is, a specific reach effect (see FIGS. 78 and 79, etc., third special game effect) executed in the normal effect mode (third effect mode), and a character A confrontation reach effect executed in the first super effect mode (See FIG. 87, etc., the first special game effect) is a game effect (reach effect) in which character A appears, but the value of the game effect for the player (results advantageous to the player) Possibility of becoming, advantage jackpot reliability) are completely different. As a result, the value of the game production in which the same character A appears (jackpot reliability , profitable jackpot reliability, and the possibility of a favorable outcome for the player). In addition, as a result, depending on the production mode and game state, the player's excitement (tension) when the game production (ready production) in which the character A appears is executed is enhanced, and the game production is diversified. It is possible to prevent fatigue.

In addition, since the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode that can be executed in the super effect mode, the player can select the second super effect mode if he/she does not like the effect mode such as the first super effect mode. You can play games with As a result, it is possible to provide game performances that suit the tastes of the players, and to increase the interest in the games of various players. In addition, in the first super production mode, there is a possibility of a disadvantageous big win only when a specific game production (character A confrontation ready-to-win) is executed, and a disadvantageous big win is possible when other game productions are executed. By eliminating the possibility, a performance mode is adopted in which the highest emphasis is placed on which game performance is executed.

On the other hand, in the second super production mode, there is a possibility of an advantageous jackpot or a disadvantageous jackpot when any of a plurality of game effects (J reach, K reach, A reach, L reach) is executed. The possibility of winning an advantageous jackpot varies depending on the game performance to be executed. As a result, even when any one of the plurality of game effects is executed, the game effect can be viewed with a certain degree of expectation for the advantageous big win. Conversely, even when any one of the plurality of game effects is executed, the game effect can be viewed with a certain degree of anxiety that a disadvantageous jackpot will occur. In addition, this makes it possible to heighten the excitement (tension) of the player and heighten the amusement of the game.

[Other Execution Modes of Game Profit Acquisition Effect]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94, another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect of Example 2 will be described. As described above, the game profit acquisition effect is a effect indicating how much the game profit is obtained in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called continuous state (continuous period), and when the low-probability-low base state (state A) becomes a big hit, the game state becomes the low-probability-low base state again. It refers to the state until (excluding the jackpot game state). This is an effect that indicates the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state. In addition, in another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect described later, the total earned game profit acquired in the specific state (specific period) and the unit period (period including one jackpot game) in the specific state (specific period) ), and the first image display device 7 (second display device), the second image display device 71 (first display device), and/or the third image according to the gaming situation Each is displayed on the display device 72 (first display device).

That is, the obtained game profit amounts for different periods are displayed on a plurality of separately arranged display devices, and the display device to be displayed is changed according to the game situation. Incidentally, it is preferable to provide at least one or more of the plurality of separately arranged display devices inside and outside the game area. As a result, the player can easily and reliably grasp the game profit obtained during a desired period according to the game situation. In addition, "to display according to the game situation" means to display according to the game state such as low probability high base state, high probability high base state high probability low base state, normal production mode, first super production mode , 2nd super effect mode, 1st count effect mode, 2nd count effect mode and so on. It should be noted that the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 may display the effect symbol 8 according to the game situation, such as when executing the ready-to-win effect. The display screen 71a is also called a second effect symbol display portion, and the display screen 72a is also called a third effect symbol display portion.

FIG. 88(a) shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol (first special symbol) is being executed in the low-probability-low base state (normal state). As shown in FIG. 88(a), in the low-probability-low base state (normal state), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first image display device, first effect display device) provided substantially in the center of the game area 3 The (first display screen) includes a production design display area 7b (production design display unit) that displays the production design 8 and an production suspension display area that displays production suspension (first production suspension 9a or second production suspension 9b). A first effect pending display area 9c or a second effect pending display area 9d) is provided. In addition, on the display screen 71a (second display screen) of the second image display device 71 provided in the outer area (first outer area) (on the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 88) of the game area 3, from the time of power-on, or , If the jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on, the first fluctuation count display unit 203 (first bonus fluctuation count display unit, execution period display) that displays the number of times of variation display of the effect symbols from the end of the previous jackpot game part) is provided.

Here, it is shown that 78 times of variable display of performance symbols have been completed since the end of the previous jackpot game (currently, the 79th variable display is being executed). In addition, on the display screen 72a (third display screen) of the third image display device 72 provided in the outer area (second outer area) (on the right side of the paper surface of FIG. 88) of the game area 3, an effect indicating the current effect mode is displayed. A mode display section 171 is provided. And the character of "normal mode" which shows that the present production|presentation mode is normal production|presentation mode 181 is displayed.

FIG. 88(b) shows a scene in which the aforementioned "thunder reach (specific reach effect)" is executed as the reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variable display of the same effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 88(a). showing. At this time (during the ready-to-win effect execution), the effect mode display portion 171, the first effect pending display portion 9c, and the variable display portion 9e are erased, and the first display screen, the second display screen, and the third display screen are displayed. A game effect (ready-to-win effect) is displayed using three display screens (substantially the whole). However, as shown in FIG. 88(b) and the like, other display units (the effect mode display unit 171, the effect pending display unit, the variable display unit, the total earned profit display unit and the second earned profit display, which will be described later). etc.) is temporarily not displayed, the display of the first variation count display 203 is maintained without being erased. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the game period from the previous big win game (the game period from power-on) regardless of the game situation.

In addition, this allows the player to check how long he or she has played the game without going through the big win game, thereby preventing excessive investment in the game. Also, even when the player is not playing a game (demonstration image is being displayed, etc.), the display of the first variation count display section 203 is maintained without being erased. As a result, other players can use the information as reference when selecting a gaming machine. In addition, even when the game information is not displayed on the island facility or the like, it is possible to clearly and reliably notify the game information by always displaying it on the game machine.

FIG. 88(c) shows the result of the variable display of the same production pattern 8 as in FIG. 88(b). The result of the ready-to-win production shown in FIG. ”) is stopped. Also, in the bonus type display portion 201, characters of "first bonus" are displayed to notify that the jackpot type is the first bonus advantageous to the player. In the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state), since the first special symbol success/failure determination is executed, the jackpot type advantageous to the player here means the 4R first jackpot. The first bonus (jackpot) advantageous to the player means that the production mode (game state) after the jackpot game ends shifts to the super production mode (high probability/low base state). Also at this time, the display of the first change number display section 203 is maintained without being erased.

FIG. 89(d) shows a scene during execution (3Rth) of the jackpot game (4R first jackpot game) based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 88(c). A special period (continuous period) is started based on the execution of the jackpot game from the normal state. During the special period, the total earned profit display section 164 (second profit information display section) that displays the gaming profit earned during the special period, and the second earned profit display section 204 (first profit information display section) ) and . In addition, the special period shall end when the game state is again set to the normal state (low probability low base state) during the period excluding the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89(d), in the game situation during the jackpot game, in the upper center of the display screen 7a (first display screen) of the first image display device 7 provided in the game area, A total earned profit display portion 164 indicating the total number of game profits is provided (T: 00350pt). This means that 350 game balls were paid out during the special period.

In addition, a second winning profit display portion 204 is provided on the lower right of the display screen 7a to indicate the total number of game profits earned in the jackpot game being executed (350/600). This means that the maximum number of game balls (the number of prize balls) to be paid out in this jackpot game is 600, and currently 350 game balls have been paid out. It should be noted that during the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot generated in the normal state), the value displayed on the total earned profit display portion 164 and the value displayed on the second earned profit display portion 204 are the same value. Therefore, only one of them may be displayed, or both may be displayed as in this embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, only at the time of the first hit, "the maximum number of game balls (the number of prize balls) to be paid out in the jackpot game" is displayed. display. In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is indicated at the upper left of the display screen 7a (3R: 3rd round).

A shooting direction display section 162 indicating the shooting direction (shooting area) of the game ball is provided on the upper right of the display screen 7a. Also, in the substantially central portion (other display area) of the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character pattern or background pattern is displayed. Also, the first variation number display section 203 is displayed without being erased on the second display screen 71a. As a result, even during the jackpot game, it is necessary to change the value (78 times) displayed in the first fluctuation number display unit 203 (special symbol win/fail judgment) from the previous jackpot game to the current jackpot game. You can easily check what you have done. Also, other display areas of the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a display a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character pattern or background pattern.

FIG. 89(e) shows a scene in which variable display of performance symbols is performed a predetermined number of times in the high probability/low base state set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89(d) is finished. Concretely, from the display (14 times) of the first variation frequency display section 203, it can be grasped that after the big hit game shown in FIG. In addition, since the game state after the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89(d) is set to the high-probability-low base state (because it is not set to the low-probability-low base state), the special period is continuing. Here, in the second embodiment, as described above, as the effect modes of the super effect mode, the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183 are provided. By selecting , it is possible to select one of the production modes. Since the selection period and selection method of the production mode in the high-probability-low base state are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted. The second display screen 71a includes a second effect mode display portion 202 (selected mode display portion) that displays the effect mode selected by the player, and an effect mode display portion 171 (first effect mode) that displays the effect mode being executed. mode display section).

The effect mode display unit 171 displays the characters "super effect mode" indicating that the super effect mode, and the second effect mode display unit 202 displays the first super effect mode as the effect mode of the super effect mode. The characters "1st SM" are displayed to indicate the selection. In addition, in the gaming situation in the high-probability-low base state (first super effect mode), a total earned profit display section 164 ( second profit information display section) is provided (T: 00720pt). This means that 720 game balls were paid out during the special period. From the scene shown in FIG. 89(d), 370 game balls are additionally paid out during the remaining period of the jackpot game and the period of 14 revolutions in the first super effect mode.

Also, in the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, an effect for the first super effect mode, such as a character design imitating an airplane, is displayed. A second effect pending display portion 9d is provided on the lower right of the display screen 7a. A second earned profit display section 204 (first profit information display section) is provided on the third display screen 72a. In this second earned profit display unit 204, the game profit obtained in the big hit game shown in FIG. display the game profit obtained by adding the acquired game profit. That is, the second earned profit display section 204 displays the total amount of game profits earned during the period of one big win game and the period from the big win game to the occurrence of the next big win game. The period from the start of this one jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game is also called a unit special period (first period), and the game profit acquired during this unit special period is a unit game profit (first profit information ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 89(e), the unit game profit is displayed in the second earned profit display section 204, and the type of the previous big hit (jackpot game) is displayed (first B: first Bonus). Thereby, in the unit special period, it is possible to easily comprehend how much game profit was obtained in which kind of jackpot game and subsequent game state. Also, the change (increase) in the display (value) of the unit game profit continues as long as the first super effect mode shown in FIG. When the tokens are paid out, the value of the total earned profit display section 164 on the display screen 7a and the value of the second earned profit display section 204 on the third display screen 72a increase (by the same number) in conjunction with each other. .

In the scene shown in FIG. 89(e), since it is the first unit special period in the special period, the value of the total earned profit display section 164 and the value of the second earned profit display section 204 match. . If the special period lasts for a long period of time and a plurality of unit special periods occur in accordance with the occurrence of the jackpot game a plurality of times, these values will differ.

Figure 89 (f) continues the first super effect mode (high-probability-low base state) shown in Figure 89 (e), and the 29th effect pattern from the end of the previous jackpot game (Fig. 89 (d)) The scene during execution of the variable display is shown. As shown in FIG. 89(f), the ready-to-win effect is generated in the 29th variable display of the effect pattern. When the ready-to-win effect occurs in the first super effect mode (high probability/low base state), the second effect mode display section 202 displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, and the effect mode The display unit 171, the total earned profit display unit 164, the second effect pending display unit 9d, the firing direction display unit 162, and the second earned profit display unit 204 display the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. is hidden (erased) from The ready-to-win effect is displayed on all of the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. It should be noted that even during the ready-to-win effect, the display of the first variation number display section 203 is maintained without being erased.

FIG. 90(g) shows the result of the variable display of the same effect pattern 8 as in FIG. 89(f). The result of the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. ”) is displayed in a stopped state. Also, in the bonus type display section 201, characters of "third bonus" are displayed to notify that the jackpot type is the third bonus advantageous to the player. In the first super performance mode (high-probability-low base state), the second special symbol success/failure determination is executed, so the jackpot type advantageous to the player here means the 15R third jackpot. In addition, the 4R fourth jackpot is also a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, the third bonus (jackpot) advantageous to the player is a jackpot game with the maximum game profit that can be obtained, and the production mode (game state) after the jackpot game ends is the super production mode (high probability and low base state). Also at this time, the display of the first change number display section 203 is maintained without being erased.

FIG. 90(h) shows a scene during execution (13Rth) of the jackpot game (15R third jackpot game) based on the jackpot shown in FIG. 90(g). The special period started with the start of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89(d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 90(h), in the game situation during the jackpot game, a total earned profit display section 164 indicating the total number of game profits earned in the special period is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a (T : 02850pt). This means that 2850 game balls were paid out during the special period. Specifically, between the game profit obtained in the last big hit game shown in FIG. 90(h), the value (T : 02850pt).

In addition, a second winning profit display portion 204 indicating the total number of game profits earned in the jackpot game being executed (FIG. 90(h)) is provided on the lower right of the display screen 7a (01950pt). This means that 1950 game balls have been paid out in the jackpot game being executed. As shown in FIG. 90(h), etc., in this embodiment, the total earned profit display section 164 and the second earned profit display section are displayed during the variable display of performance symbols such as the high-probability-low base state and during the jackpot game. 204 are displayed on different display devices. As a result, the profit display section is set at an appropriate position according to the game situation, and the game profit obtained in a desired period is accurately and reliably reported to the player so that the player can grasp it.

In FIG. 90(i), the production mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 90(h) is set to the super production mode (high probability/low base state), ) in which the variable display of the performance symbols is performed 22 times (the scene during the execution of the 23rd variable display of the performance symbols). As shown in the second display screen 71(a), the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, and the second super effect mode is set by the player's selection (second SM: second super effect mode). .

In the scene shown in FIG. 90(i), as described above, the second unit special period is being executed, so the third display screen 72a is provided with a plurality of second earned profit display sections 204. there is At the top of the third display screen 72a, the earned gaming profit in the unit special period being executed is shown (3B, 2960pt). As a result, it can be understood that the jackpot game that occurred during the current unit special period is the third bonus, and that 2960 game profits are currently awarded during the current unit special period. Also, below it (immediately below), the earned gaming profit in the previous unit special period is shown (1B, 28, 885pt). When the unit special period ends, the second earned profit display section 204 is added (appended) with a second variation frequency display section 205 (second between-bonus variation frequency display section, period information display section). By looking at the additional information, it is possible to grasp how long it took from the end of the jackpot game to the occurrence of the next jackpot game in the unit special period (whether the number of Nankai fluctuations was required). . As a result, the jackpot game that occurred in the previous unit special period is the first bonus, and the number of times of fluctuation display of the production pattern between the jackpot games (the number of times of special pattern propriety determination) is 28 times (period information). , it can be grasped that 885 game profits were obtained in the previous unit special period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 90(i), when there are multiple unit special periods due to the occurrence of multiple jackpot games during the special period, the third display screen 72a displays multiple second earned profit display portions. 204 is displayed. In this case, the second earned profit display portion 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed (ongoing) is displayed more conspicuously than the second earned profit display portion 204 corresponding to the unit special period that has already ended. Specifically, the current execution is displayed in a larger size than the completed one, and the currently executed one is decorated (addition of a picture, addition of a frame, etc.) that is not present in the completed one. , can be displayed in bold.

In addition, a total earned profit display portion 164 is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and displays the amount of game profit earned during the entire special period, that is, the period obtained by adding all the unit special periods (T: 03845pt ). Specifically, the two second earned profit display portions 204 on the third display screen 72a
If 2960 and 885 displayed in , are added, the value (3845) displayed in the total earned profit display section 164 is obtained. In addition, the change in the display (value) of the unit game profit displayed on the second earned profit display section 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed continues as long as the super effect mode continues. Therefore, when a game profit (prize ball) is awarded due to the occurrence of a small winning game, the value of the total earned profit display section 164 of the display screen 7a increases, and the unit special value during execution of the third display screen 72a increases. The value of the (topmost) second earned profit display section 204 corresponding to the period is increased by the same number. Note that the value of the second earned profit display section 204 corresponding to the unit special period that has ended in the lower portion has already been determined, so it does not change.

FIG. 91(j) shows that the second super effect mode (high-probability/low-base state) shown in FIG. This shows a scene where the variable display has ended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(j), a ready-to-win effect is generated in the 45th variable display of the effect pattern, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the confrontation effect in the ready-to-win effect, resulting in a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player. It shows the scene where Although not shown, after that, a jackpot game (fourth bonus) disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low-probability base state or a high-probability base state. state, and the high probability low base state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, ends.

Also, in the fourth bonus (2R 5th jackpot game, 2R 6th jackpot game, 2R 7th jackpot game, or 2R 8th jackpot game), it is possible to obtain a game profit, but compared to other jackpot games small amount. Therefore, even during execution of the big win game, the execution is displayed in a way that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the execution compared to other big win games. Also, for the unit special period including the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, the corresponding second earned profit display section 204 does not display the earned profit. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the fourth bonus (2R 5th big win game, 2R 6th big win game, 2R 7th big win game, or 2R 8th big win game), thereby minimizing the decline in the interest in the game. make it possible to prevent Further, when a game profit is obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, it may be displayed only on the total earned profit display unit 164 without being added to the second obtained profit display unit 204 (without being displayed). good. Further, the game profit obtained in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus may be added to the second earned profit display section 204 corresponding to the previous unit special period as the game profit obtained in the previous unit special period. In this embodiment, when a game profit is obtained in a jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, neither the second earned profit display section 204 nor the total earned profit display section 164 are added and displayed.

In the scene shown in FIG. 91(k), a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the player has won a jackpot disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. A scene in which the count effect mode is set is shown. As described above, the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a disadvantageous jackpot (2R fifth jackpot, 2R sixth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot, or 2R eighth jackpot), and the count set after the jackpot game ends The effect mode is the second count effect mode. In addition, the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a disadvantageous jackpot (4R second jackpot), and the count effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game is the first count effect mode. As shown in FIG. 91(k), in the second count effect mode 185, the remaining period display section 206 is provided in the upper part of the display screen 7a, and the number of times of fluctuation display of the effect symbol is displayed on the remaining period display section 206 (special By displaying the number of remaining times of the symbol suitability determination), it is possible to play the game while grasping the remaining period of the second count effect mode.

On the other hand, in the first count effect mode 184, the remaining period display section 206 that displays the remaining period (number of times) of the first count effect mode except for the end of the first count effect mode (for example, five times before the end) is displayed. None (FIGS. 94(e) and (f)). This is the point that the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 are partially different in display mode. In addition, in the game situation where the production mode (game state) is set to the countdown mode (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), a total earned profit display section 164 is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. there is In addition, three (plural) second earned profit display portions 204 are provided on the third display screen 72a. Since the count effect mode is currently in progress, the characters "C mode" indicating the count mode are displayed in the second earned profit display section 204 at the top. As described above, in the big hit game that sets the count mode, and in the count mode (low-probability base state or high-probability base state), the game profit that can be obtained is small, so the second obtained profit display unit 204 do not display earned profits in

In addition, the second earned profit display section 204 at the top of the third display screen 72a indicates the unit special period currently in progress, and the second earned profit display section 204 below it indicates the previous unit special period that has already ended. , and the second earned profit display section 204 below it shows the unit special period that has already ended before the previous one. In this embodiment, it is possible to display up to three second earned profit display portions 204 on the third display screen 72a, and when four or more jackpot games (unit special periods) occur, the oldest one is displayed first. It is intended to be deleted. Incidentally, the number of second earned profit display portions 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a may be any number of four or more.

Figure 91 (l) continues the count effect mode (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) shown in Fig. 91 (k), the 40th time from the end of the previous jackpot game (Fig. 91 (j)) The result of the variable display of the production pattern is a scene of a big hit. FIG. 92(m) shows a scene during execution (10th R) of the big win game (15R third big win game) based on the big win shown in FIG. 91(l). The special period started with the start of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 89(d) is continuing. As shown in FIG. 92(m), in the gaming situation during the jackpot game, a total earned profit display portion 164 indicating the total number of game profits earned in the special period is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a (T :05385pt). In addition, a second winning profit display portion 204 is provided at the lower right of the display screen 7a (01450pt) to indicate the total number of game profits earned in the jackpot game being executed (FIG. 92(m)).

In FIG. 92(n), the production mode (game state) after the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 92(m) is set to the super production mode (high probability/low base state), ) in which the variable display of the performance symbols is performed four times (the scene during the execution of the variable display of the fifth performance symbols). As shown in the second display screen 71a, the player selects the first super effect mode (first SM).

Further, in the scene shown in FIG. 90(n), since the fourth unit special period in the special period is being executed, the number of second earned profit display portions 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a is exceeded. there is Therefore, the oldest second acquired profit display section 204 is deleted, and the second acquired profit display section 204 corresponding to the newly executed unit special period is provided at the top (3B, 2350pt). In addition, it is possible to grasp the continuation of the special period due to the pullback (occurrence of a big hit) during the count performance mode from the "C mode" displayed in the second acquired profit display part 204 therebelow. According to the flow described above, the total earned profit display portion 164 and the second earned profit display portion 204 are displayed on a predetermined display screen according to the gaming situation.

FIG. 93(a) shows a scene in which a jackpot is achieved in the normal state (low-probability/low-probability base state) and the jackpot effect symbol ("666") is stopped and displayed. A "second bonus" is displayed in the bonus type display portion 201 of the display screen 7a. In the second bonus, the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big win game is set to the super effect mode (high probability/low base state) according to the result of the game effect (confrontation effect) executed during the big win game. There are cases where it is set to count production mode (low probability high base state). The count effect mode in this case is the first count effect mode 184 .

FIG. 93(b) shows a big win game (second bonus) executed based on the big win shown in FIG. 93(a). During or at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, a victory effect is executed in which the friend character defeats the enemy character, and after the jackpot game ends, the super effect mode (high-probability-low base state) is set. It is In FIG. 93(c), the first super effect mode (high probability/low base state) is set after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 93(b), and in the first super effect mode (high probability/low base state), It shows a scene in which the variable display (special symbol propriety determination) of the effect symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (14 times).

FIG. 94(d) shows a big win game (second bonus) executed based on the big win shown in FIG. 93(a). During or at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, a defeat effect in which the enemy character defeats the ally character is executed, and the count effect mode (low-probability-high base state) is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is 94(e) shows that the count effect mode (low probability high base state) is set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 94(d), and in the count effect mode (low probability high base state), a predetermined number of time), the scene where the variable display of the production pattern (special design propriety judgment) is executed. As described above, the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94(e) is the first count effect mode 184. However, the display The remaining period display section is not set on the screen 7a. This is because the execution period set in the second count effect mode has two types of 50 times or 100 times, whereas the execution period set in the first count effect mode is only one type of 100 times. It depends.

FIG. 94(f) shows a scene in which the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94(e) is changed and the effect symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times to advance the count effect mode. As shown in the first variation number display portion 203 of the second display screen 71a, the variation display of the performance symbols (special symbol success/failure determination) has been executed 96 times since the end of the previous big hit game, and the count performance mode is being executed. Except for the variable display of , the process ends when the variable display of the effect symbols is performed for the remaining three times. In order to indicate that the end time of the count effect mode is near, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of times reaches 3, a remaining period display section 206 is provided on the display screen 7a, and the last 3 times, last 2 times, and last 1 time are displayed. is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the end time of the count effect mode in advance.

As described above, according to the game situation, the amount of game profit obtained in different periods of the special period (continuous period) is displayed on a plurality of separately arranged display devices. It is possible to easily and reliably grasp the game profit obtained during (the special period or the unit special period). Also, by changing the display device to be displayed according to the game situation, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp the game profit.

[Other aspects]
In this embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the performance symbol display section are changed to special symbols (first special symbols or 2nd special pattern) synchronously with the variable display of the variable display. That is, 1 production pattern (three digits) is displayed on the production pattern display unit, and synchronized with one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special pattern. It has a case and a case of synchronizing with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first production pattern is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special pattern, and the second production pattern is changed to the second special pattern. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of . Also, when both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are displayed, the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (one special pattern) set as the main part of the game in the game state is displayed large (the main part ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is set to 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of always displaying both the first production pattern and the second production pattern, depending on the game state and the game situation, when both the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, and the first production pattern is displayed. One of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (main pattern) may be displayed.

In addition, for the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a "variable ball entrance" that can change between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball cannot be entered, A "special game executing means" capable of executing a special game that puts the variable ball entrance into a ball-enterable state when the result of the first win-or-fail judgment or the second win-fail judgment can be provided. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than that in the game state. and a "game state setting means" for setting the state (second game state). Here, 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of times the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is opened in one round is one, but the number of times the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is opened in one round is plural. times, or may have different number of open rounds. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing that can be changed simultaneously, but the control processing that prioritizes the second special figure reservation over the first special figure reservation , So-called Toku-zu 2 priority control processing, control processing to digest the first Toku-zu reservation preferentially to the second Toku-zu reservation, so-called Toku-zu 1 priority control processing. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and the first special reservation and the second special reservation are digested in order from the oldest one. It may be a control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in order of memory).

In addition, a pachinko machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state) has a specific area inside, and has a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening is provided that can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and the big winning opening is placed in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball for a predetermined time when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a big winning hole in which a ball is possible and passes through a specific area, it becomes a big win, a big win game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given to a Pachinko game machine. This pachinko game machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big win game is executed without passing through the specific area. Also, as a benefit, there is the generation of a high base state that increases the frequency of entry of game balls into the starting hole. Further, it has a first starting hole and a second starting hole, and can generate a high base state that increases the frequency of hitting the second starting hole. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability variation function can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability variation function. is not limited to this, for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as medium probability (third probability) higher than low probability (first probability) and lower than high probability (second probability) good too. Furthermore, first low probability and first high probability (first probability condition), second low probability and second high probability (second probability condition), third low probability and third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected) when the gaming machine is powered on, for example. good too.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read, and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Pre-judgment) was supposed to be performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see Figs. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of pre-judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, the area (acquired information storage means) that stores the acquired information that is subject to preliminary determination (that is, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball) is stored in the main control unit and sub-control It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it may be pre-determined for the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, it may be determined in advance before storing the acquisition information in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to preliminary judgment separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit need to be read out for preliminary judgment No.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the production mode D (state C, specific game state), when the specific period is started under the condition that three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period , the prize ball count image S is displayed and the prize ball count image C2 is added and displayed (second profit effect) based on the ball entering the big prize hole for the small win, and when the specific period ends, the prize An effect is performed in which the number of won prize balls indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (summed) to the number of won prize balls (total number of won prize balls, total number of won prize balls) of the prize ball count image C1. It was. On the other hand, when a new second special figure suspension (entering the third start port 26) occurs during a specific period, and the suspension is determined to be a small hit suspension by prior determination (holding look-ahead) , may be configured such that a specific period of time currently being executed is extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started under the condition that four small hit reservations are continuously stored, and two small hit reservations are consumed after the start. At this time, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "2". Under that situation, when a new second special figure reservation occurs and the number of special figure 2 reservation balls becomes "3", and it is pre-determined that the reservation is a small hit reservation, a specific period counter (see S5005) +1 (add 1). As a result, the specific period is extended until the newly generated (stored) small-hit reserve is consumed and the small-hit game related to the small-hit reserve is completed. Alternatively, after the specific period has started in the same way, in a situation where two small hits are digested and the number of special 2 reserved balls is "2", it corresponds to the number of special 2 reserved balls "3" It is assumed that the second special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservation balls "4" occur in succession. Then, in advance that the second special figure reservation corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls "3" is off reservation, and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls "4" is a small hit reservation Suppose it is judged. In this case, by adding "+2" (2 additions) to the specific period counter (see S5005), the small hit reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "4" is digested, and the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. A specified period may be extended until In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period during which the display of the prize ball number image S and the prize ball count image C2 are displayed in addition (second profit effect) is increased. Since it will be extended, it becomes possible to heighten the production effect of profit production more.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the two conditions of (1) three or more small winning reserves are continuously stored, and (2) winning the start lottery of the specific period are set to the start of the specific period. However, the condition for starting the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality (for example, two or more) of small hit reservations are stored although they are not continuous, or a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small prize reservations are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. It is good also as a starting condition of a specific period that it is. In this case, the conditions for starting the specific period are relaxed compared to the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to occur (start). Alternatively, only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above may be used as the condition for starting the specific period.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of state C (high-probability-low base state) occurs, a mode selection period for selecting the production mode of state C before shifting to state C When the jackpot is a 4R jackpot (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the jackpot game, and a 15R jackpot (15R jackpot) occurs. 3 jackpots), a mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game (in the present embodiment, from the start of the 14th round to the middle of the 15th round). On the other hand, if the number of rounds of the jackpot that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, one type of 10 rounds, and the game state when the 10R jackpot occurs is the state A (left-handed game), the ending period A mode selection period occurs during, and if it is in state B or C (right-handed game), a mode selection period may occur in a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R middle). Of these, in the latter case, in the round before the mode selection period occurs, a notification to the effect that the mode selection period will start from the next round (pre-selection period start notification) may be performed. In addition, when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the jackpot game, the occurrence timing, that is, the round that becomes the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, from the start of 5R to the end of 6R. , only in the final round, etc., it can occur in any round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the big hit, in the round production of the final round before the ending period starts, the notification that the mode selection period will start after this (notification before the start of the selection period) can be

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the production mode selection (selection of production mode C or D) during the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the production button. On the other hand, any one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes may be automatically selected by a lottery or the like on the sub-control side as the effect mode selection in the mode selection period. In this case, for example, with the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one aspect of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into a roulette shape is displayed on the display screen of the image display device. An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by a roulette lottery may be performed as an effect (mode selection effect) during the mode selection period. In addition, in the present embodiment, there are two types of production modes (production modes C and D) for the state C, but three or more types may be provided, and one production mode may be selectable from among them.

In addition, the mode (variation mode, stop mode, ready-to-win mode, etc.) related to the variable display of the production pattern shown in the above-described embodiment, and the production executed with the small hit in the state C (production modes C, D) Aspects of (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, etc.), aspects of notice effect (display of notice image) in effect mode D, aspects of notification screen and mode selection screen related to mode selection period, etc. The modes of various effects are merely examples, and the modes of effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the preview image is displayed in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (the preview image display area U). On the other hand, the preview image may be displayed on other image display devices included in the game machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Furthermore, in addition to the image display device consisting of a liquid crystal display, display means (effect display device) for other effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided, and the above-mentioned effect mode D is performed using the display means. It may be configured to be able to execute a preview effect corresponding to the display of the preview image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in front of the front frame 51 (pachinko game machine 1). However, the third image display device 72 is similarly rotatable, and the initial state (first state) and the tilted state ( second state). In this way, the relationship with hall equipment (CR units, ball lending machines, other equipment between machines) and game machines (frame open) adjacent to the right side of the game machine will not be hindered. becomes possible.

In the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) are provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but the sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the main liquid crystal (the first image display device) as the board side display means. device 7), or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub-liquid crystal or right sub-liquid crystal) is replaced with one sub-liquid crystal on the game board side. can be done. Alternatively, while the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment are provided, it is also possible to provide one or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side. be. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image display device 7) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area) The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), but the type of the display device is not limited to liquid crystal, and may be, for example, a drum display device or the like. A dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like can also be used. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed in a plurality of display devices, each of which consists of a main display device and a sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display device or a 7-segment display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be dot displays. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of presentations using a plurality of display devices having different display methods, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the variable display and stop display of the effect symbols 8 are, in principle, performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) located substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) (FIGS. 58, FIGS. 67 to 73, FIG. 74(a), FIG. 75, and FIG. 76), when executing the full rotation effect, the left design (effect design 8L) is displayed on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal), The central display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) displays the middle pattern (effect pattern 8C), and the right display screen 72a (right sub-liquid crystal) displays the right pattern (effect pattern 8R) (see the middle of FIG. 77). . In other words, the effect symbols (stop effect symbols) that are stopped and displayed after the variable display are basically displayed on the first image display device 7, and in the full rotation effect, the middle symbols of the stop effect symbols are displayed as the first image. The left pattern and the right pattern are displayed on the display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, even in variable effects other than the full rotation effect, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be configured to display part of the stop effect symbol.

For example, after starting the variable display of the production pattern 8 on the first image display device 7, when the left pattern and the right pattern are stopped (temporarily stopped) on the screen and the ready-to-win state is established, the ready-to-win state is configured. The left pattern and the right pattern (a part of the stop effect pattern) are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In that state, after the ready-to-win effect display is performed on the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) and displayed on the first image display device 7, and then the second image display device 71 is displayed. And the left pattern and the right pattern displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side on the left and right of the middle pattern, and finally three production patterns (stop production patterns) are displayed. is displayed. Also, for example, it indicates whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot depending on the type of pattern when the production pattern 8 is displayed in a jackpot mode (double eyes) on the first image display device 7 (for example, a red pattern If there is a probability big hit, if it is a symbol other than a red pattern, a chance big hit, etc.), When performing a so-called "re-lottery effect" when a big hit mode that is not a probability variable big hit is displayed, when executing the re-lottery effect, all the above-mentioned The middle pattern is displayed on the first image display device 7 like a rotating effect, the left pattern and the right pattern are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and these three patterns are displayed respectively. A re-lottery performance is performed by synchronizing and scrolling display on the device. By providing a production mode (variable production pattern) such as a reach production and a re-lottery production, the display variation of the production pattern 8 (stop production pattern) that is stopped after the variable display is increased, and the variation production is diversified. It becomes possible to

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) are small liquid crystal display devices compared to the first image display device 7 (main display device). The display screen has a substantially square shape (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the size (screen size) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub display device) may be larger than that shown in the embodiment. Specifically, the length of the display screens of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) is equal to that of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device). A vertically long rectangular image display device (liquid crystal display device) whose length in the vertical direction (longitudinal direction) is approximately the same as or longer than that of the front frame 51 and is provided on the left and right sides of the viewing window 51a on the front surface of the front frame 51. may Also in this case, the image display device provided on the front left side of the front frame 51 is rotatably pivotally supported in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. By providing such a vertically long rectangular image display device on the gaming machine frame side (front frame) as a sub display device, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect display that gives more impact to the player. In particular, the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the sub display device provided on the game machine frame side is the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the game board side. ), and by arranging the sub-display devices side by side in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the main display device, the effect display that develops on the display screen of the main display device. However, an effect display (wide display in the horizontal (left and right) direction) can be performed by extending (enlarging) to one or both of the sub display devices positioned on the left and right.

Specifically, for example, while the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern is being executed on the first image display device 7 (main display device), the aspect of the variable effect being executed (variable effect pattern) is In the case of a specific mode, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually expanded to the display screen of the image display device (sub display device) on the frame side ( It is possible to perform effects such as expanding (expanding) or enlarging (expanding) the entire display screen at once. Alternatively, when the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a stationary manner after being displayed on the main display device, the production pattern is enlarged and displayed, and one of the left pattern and the right pattern among the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. It is also possible to display some or all of them on the display screens of the left and right sub display devices, respectively, and display the middle pattern on the display screen of the main display device.

The display contents are displayed from the main display device (board-side display device) located approximately in the center of the game board (inside the game area) to the sub-display devices (frame-side display devices) located on the left and right (outside the game area). In order to obtain the effect of expanding (expanding) the (display area), the length of the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the sub display device must be at least direction) is preferably 1/2 or more, preferably 2/3 or more.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with display means for performing variable display of identification information, and capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. there is In this type of gaming machine, it is possible to show (notify) the result of the variable display to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-370).

In the gaming machine having the display means as described above, the player proceeds with the game while paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player becomes bored with the game as the variable display of the identification information is repeated many times, and it becomes difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a new mode of display that attracts the player's interest in the display of identification information, and to improve the interest of the game. It is to plan.

The game machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and notifying the results of the variable display by the display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
Equipped with variable display means capable of executing variable display of identification information,
The variable display means is
When stopping the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stop mode when the variable display is stopped depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

According to such a game machine, while the identification information is being variably displayed by the variably displaying means, when the variably displaying is stopped, the variably displaying is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner. Then, it is possible to change the stop mode depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and guess the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) after that. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of patterns,
As a stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, at least a first stop mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped in a predetermined first stop order, and a stop mode in which the plurality of symbols are stopped in the first stop order. a second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order,
As display modes of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode that triggers the execution of a predetermined special game and a second display that triggers the execution of another special game different from the predetermined special game. and a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The variable display means is
when the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode;
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the identification information is variably displayed by variably displaying these symbols. In such a configuration, as a stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, that is, when the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped, at least the plurality of symbols are stopped in the first stop order. and a second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the first stop order (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped The display modes of the (plurality of symbols) include at least a first display mode that triggers execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode that triggers another special game different from the special game, and a special game. and a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of When the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is displayed in the first stop order ( 1st stop mode), and if it is the 2nd display mode or the 3rd display mode, stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols in the 2nd stop order (2nd stop mode) is possible. Therefore, the player can guess the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it will be executed, the possibility, etc., through the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 described above,
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, it further has a fourth display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
As a stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, a third stop mode is provided in which the plurality of symbols are stopped at substantially the same time,
The variable display means is
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. be.

According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display of the identification information (plurality of symbols), furthermore, execution of a special game If the display mode of the identification information (plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the fourth display mode is the fourth display mode. The variable display of the plurality of symbols can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop times (stop timings) of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same. For this reason, a mode (third stop mode) in which the non-executability of the special game can be recognized immediately is included in the stop mode of the variable display when the display mode not triggering the execution of the special game is derived and displayed. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to diversify the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player from unnecessarily arousing the player's expectation for the execution of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above,
A predetermined effect display is executed when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. , a predetermined effect display is executed accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize to the player that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, that the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is executed. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 1-2 to 1-4 described above,
A state control means capable of controlling a game state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state,
The second game state is characterized in that, compared to the first game state, the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is more frequently the first display mode. be.

According to such a gaming machine, at least the first game state and the second game state are provided as game states when the identification information is displayed with variation, and the second game state is the first game state. As compared with , the frequency of the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is set to the first display mode is high. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the display in the first display mode is higher than in the first display mode. Therefore, in the second game state, the frequency of the variable display of the identification information being stopped in the first stop mode increases. As a result, in the second game state, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is heightened. It is possible to incite.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
At least a first design type and a second design type are included as the types of patterns that constitute the identification information,
The first display mode is composed of symbols of the second symbol type out of the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
At least part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first game state are the second symbol type in the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, at least the first symbol type and the second symbol type are provided as the types of symbols constituting the identification information. Among these first symbol type and second symbol type, A first display mode is composed of the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first game state are the second symbol type in the second game state. It is a thing. Therefore, in the first game state, the symbols that cannot constitute the first display mode because they are the symbols of the first symbol type change to the symbols that can constitute the first display mode in the second game state. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention not only to the stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped but also to the symbol type.

According to Reference Invention 1 described above, regarding the display of identification information, it is possible to realize a new mode of display that attracts the player's interest, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter a game ball into a variable ball entrance (for example, a big winning hole), and the game ball enters the variable ball entrance. A gaming machine is known in which a predetermined game profit (for example, a prize ball) is awarded to a player based on the following. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit to be awarded in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entrance, that is, the amount of game profit to be obtained by the player (earned profit amount) is determined by a predetermined amount. is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-35664).

However, many gaming machines have already adopted the above-described display of the amount of earned profit, and the presentation lacks freshness. The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to realize a novel aspect of the presentation for displaying the amount of earned profit, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot be entered and a state in which a game ball can be entered;
profit giving means capable of giving a predetermined game profit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance;
profit presentation executing means capable of executing a profit presentation displaying the amount of profit obtained when a game profit is awarded by the profit giving means;
and a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a game state to a specific game state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect execution means includes at least a first profit effect for adding and displaying an acquired profit amount based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance in the specific game state, and the profit effect in a specific period in the specific game state. and a second profit presentation of adding and displaying the amount of profit obtained based on the ball entering the variable entrance.

According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the variable ball entrance while being controlled to a specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player accordingly, At least two kinds of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as the effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of the game profit to be given (the amount of earned profit), of which the second profit effect can be executed. Regarding, it is to be executed during a specific period in the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the profit presentation executed based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the game amusement.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The profit presentation executing means is capable of executing the first profit presentation on a predetermined first display portion without executing the second profit presentation during a period other than the specified period, and executing the first profit presentation during the specified period. the second profit effect can be executed on a predetermined second display portion without executing the effect;
After the end of the specific period, the obtained profit amount displayed on the second display section by the second profit display during the specific period is displayed in addition to the obtained profit amount displayed on the first display section. It is characterized by being executable.

According to such a gaming machine, during the specific game state, during the period other than the specific period, the first profit presentation is executed on the first display unit based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance, and during the specific period, A second profit effect is executed on the second display section based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance. Further, when the specific period ends, the first profit presentation is performed for the earned profit amount (the earned profit amount displayed on the second display section) added by the second profit presentation executed during the specified period. An effect of adding display (addition) to the earned profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the presentation effect of the profit presentation by changing the display mode of the earned profit amount during the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on establishment of an acquisition condition;
identification information display means capable of executing variable display of identification information based on acquired information;
pre-determination means capable of pre-determining whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information before executing the variable display;
A ball can be entered into the variable entrance on the basis that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage means as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific gaming state. and

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to store the acquired information acquired based on the fulfillment of the acquisition condition, and to perform variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information. Prior to execution of the variable display, it is possible to determine in advance whether the acquired information is the specific acquired information, and if the acquired information is the specified acquired information, the variable display is displayed based on the specified acquired information. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and with this as a trigger, the ball can be entered into the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started under the condition that a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in a situation where it is confirmed that a ball can be entered into the variable ball entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as a trigger. As a result, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the second profit presentation accompanying the start of the specific period, and to enhance the presentation effect of the profit presentation.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above,
The specific period is characterized in that it ends after the ball is allowed to enter the variable ball entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means at the start of the specific period. be.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable ball entrance. The specified period ends after the This makes it possible to increase the certainty that the second profit presentation will be executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 or Reference Invention 2-4 described above,
The prior determination means can execute the prior determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on the fact that the preliminary determination during the specific period has newly obtained a determination result indicating that the information is the specific acquired information.

According to such a gaming machine, the advance judgment can be executed even during the specific period, and the advance judgment is executed for the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the judgment result to that effect is obtained, the specified period will be extended. As a result, the period during which the second profit presentation is executed is extended, so that the effect of the profit presentation can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-3 to 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on the fact that a determination result indicating that it is specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

According to such a gaming machine, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the acquired information is the specific acquired information in the specific game state. The mode of presentation differs depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored when executing the predetermined presentation. As a result, it is possible to produce the effect of the profit performance and the predetermined performance during the specific game state, and as a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the specific game state.

According to the reference invention 2 described above, it is possible to achieve an effect in a novel mode as the effect of displaying the amount of earned profit, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is widely known in which identification information is variably displayed, and a special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result. Among game machines of this type, there is a game machine configured so that one of a plurality of presentation modes can be selected by manual input operation (see Patent Document 1, for example). The time when the production mode can be selected can be set at various times, such as during variable display of identification information, during display of a standby screen (demo screen), during a special game (for example, during a jackpot game). It is possible. In addition, in a configuration in which selection of the production mode is possible during the special game, there is a case where the production mode after the special game is selected (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-174956).

However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the occurrence are uniform, and there is a problem that it lacks freshness. there were. This reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the interest in the game by making the selection of the performance mode after the special game in a new manner. .

The game machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot be entered and a state in which a game ball can be entered;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game consists of a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured to allow a ball to enter the variable ball entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of production modes as production modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
a selection period generation means capable of generating a selection period for enabling selection of a performance mode after the special game ends from among the plurality of performance modes at a predetermined time after the start of the special game;
and a first notification means for notifying before the start of the selection period in the round game before the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the start of the special game, it is possible to generate a selection period during which the performance mode after the special game ends can be selected from among a plurality of performance modes. When the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, the notification before the start of the selection period is performed in the round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is possible to select the production mode in a predetermined round game during the special game (a selection period occurs), and after notifying in advance in the previous round game, the selection period of the production mode It is possible to select a production mode in a new manner, such as reaching the occurrence (start). As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and eventually to improve the game interest.

In addition, the selection of the production mode in the selection period is, for example, manual selection in which the player selects and inputs any one of a plurality of production modes using a predetermined input means provided in the game machine, or one of the plurality of production modes. Includes automatic selection where either is automatically selected.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
A second notification means for notifying during the selection period in the predetermined round game when the selection period is generated in the predetermined round game during the special game;
a third notification means for notifying before the end of the selection period when the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started;
The selection period is characterized in that it ends during the round game in which the notification by the third notification means is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the selection period of the presentation mode occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game is played. is started, in the round game (the round game next to the predetermined round game), notification before the end of the selection period is performed. Then, the selection period ends during the round game (during the next round game after the predetermined round game) in which notification before the end of the selection period is performed. Therefore, when the selection period of the production mode occurs in the predetermined round game, the notification (notification by the first notification means) before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game, and the predetermined Special game by notification during the selection period performed in the round game (notification by the second notification means) and notification before the end of the selection period performed in the next round game of the predetermined round game (notification by the third notification means) It is possible to urge the player to select the subsequent performance mode. In this way, by adopting a novel notification mode of urging the player to select the production mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the production mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and since the above-mentioned notification is performed from before the start to the end of the selection period, the player can select the production mode. It is possible to avoid missing the opportunity to select the presentation mode without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
A state control means capable of controlling a game state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner;
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, and in the second game state the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. The timing of occurrence of the selection period is different between when the special game is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the second game is more advantageous to the player than in the first game state. When the display result of the variable display in the state becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed, the generation timing of the selection period of the production mode is different. As a result, it is possible to select a performance mode in a novel manner such as changing the subsequent performance mode selectable timing depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the performance mode selection from becoming monotonous. becomes possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 described above,
When the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the special game are completed. Notification during the selection period is performed,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game. It is a thing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, all the round games constituting the special game are finished. A production mode selection period occurs later, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, a predetermined round game during the special game is executed. In this case, the notification by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period) and the second 3 Notification by the notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed respectively. Therefore, when the specific display result is derived in the first game state and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the presentation mode after all the round games are completed, and the second game state is entered. When the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the presentation mode by the time all the round games are completed. As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of selection of the performance mode depending on whether the game state when the specific display result is derived is the first game state or the second game state, thereby giving different impressions to the player. can be given.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of special games as the special game,
The timing of occurrence of the selection period differs depending on the type of special game to be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the generation timing of the selection period of the production mode differs depending on the type of special game executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. As a result, it is possible to select a performance mode in a new manner such as changing the performance mode selectable time depending on the type of special game to be executed, and prevent the performance mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above,
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period occurs after all the round games constituting the first special game are completed, and the selection period is notified,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game having a relatively small number of round games constituting the special game is executed, all the round games constituting the first special game are finished. A production mode selection period will occur later, and notification during the selection period will be made. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large, the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, the notification by the first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), the notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and the notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) notification) will be performed respectively. Therefore, when the first special game (a special game with a relatively small number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the production mode after all the round games are completed, and the second special game is executed. When a game (a special game with a relatively large number of round games) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all round games are completed. As a result, it is possible to change the aspect of the presentation mode selection between the case where the first special game is executed and the case where the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give different impressions to the player. Become.

According to the reference invention 3 described above, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by performing the selection of the effect mode after the special game in a novel manner.

(Reference Invention 4)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port, and the frequency of entering a ball is reduced in a low base state, and the frequency of entering a ball is increased in a high base state. In the low base state, there was a game aimed at the first start opening, and in the high base state, the game was aimed at the second start opening. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is played aiming at the right side area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state occurs. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is performed until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various ball entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it is difficult to say that the game can proceed efficiently. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various ball entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and increase the gaming efficiency. To provide a game machine which enhances amusement in a game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
A specific starting port into which a game ball can enter,
A variable starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting hole;
identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port;
a specific game executing means for executing a specific game in which the variable starting port is in a second state when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode;
a special game executing means for executing a special game in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state in which a ball can be entered when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific starter, the first variable ball entry, the variable starter, and the second variable ball entry are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific starting port, the first variable ball-entering port, the variable starting port, and the second variable ball-entering port are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. , the specific start-up port, the first variable start-up port, the variable start-up port, and the second variable start-up port are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

Specifically, in order to smoothly proceed with the game, it is first necessary to set the variable starting port related to the execution of the special game to the second state (open state). It is placed in the uppermost part of the sphere. This increases the possibility of first setting the variable starting port to the second state (open state). Further, by adopting a gate type (gate 28) in which a game ball that has entered (passed through) the specific start opening flows down the game area thereafter, the game proceeds smoothly thereafter. Also, by arranging the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific start port, it is possible to quickly enter balls when a special game is executed, and to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball entrance upstream from the variable start hole, the game ball enters the variable start hole that is in the second state during the special game, and enters the first variable ball entrance. It is also possible to prevent situations in which ball entry is blocked.

In addition, by arranging the variable starter downstream of the first variable starter, except when the first variable starter is in a state where it is possible to enter in a special game, the variable starter is in the second state. , the falling game ball can be preferentially entered into another ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which a ball is not entered into the variable starting hole even though the variable starting hole is in the second state. In addition, by arranging the second variable ball entrance downstream of the variable starting opening, the game ball enters the second variable ball opening based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting opening. Since the frequency changes, it becomes possible to add various game features. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
As the special mode, having a first special mode and a second special mode,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stop-displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed, and when the identification information is stop-displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed,
Said first special game has more game profits that can be obtained than said second special game,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, as modes of stop display of the identification information for executing the special game, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided, and as the special game, the first special game and the second special mode are provided. 2 special games. Then, the first special game is a special game with more obtainable game profit than the second special game, the first variable ball entrance is put in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the first special game, and the second special game. Then, let the second variable ball entrance be in a state where a ball can be entered.

Specifically, first, in order to set the variable starting port to the second state (open state), the specific starting port related to this is arranged most upstream among these entrances. Next, by arranging the first variable ball entrance downstream of the specific start hole, the ball can be entered quickly when the first special game with a large game profit is executed, and a large number of game balls can be produced in a short period of time. enable acquisition. Also, next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable ball entrance, the second state of the variable ball entrance is changed except when the first variable ball entrance is in the state where the first variable ball entrance is possible in the special game. It is possible to enter the game ball flowing down into the starting hole with priority over other ball entering holes. In addition, the second variable ball entrance that allows ball entry in the second special game with a small amount of game profit is arranged downstream of the variable starter opening, making it possible to add a variety of game features. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game.

As the first special mode and the second special mode, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. Further, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (the number of rounds, the opening time, the profit that can be obtained, and the variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. Equipped with configurable game state setting means,
In the second game state, a game ball is entered into the variable starting port arranged upstream of the game area, and the second variable ball entering port arranged downstream of the variable starting port is entered. By making it difficult to enter the ball,
A game ball is more likely to enter the second variable ball opening when the second special game occurs in the first game state than in the second game state. is.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is low, and a second game state in which the frequency of ball entry is higher than that in the first game state. , the variable starting port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry port arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the second variable ball entrance is in the first game state more than the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entry of game balls to is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game amusement.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3,
The game profit obtained by entering the ball into the second variable starting hole is larger than the game profit obtained by entering the ball into the variable starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, a game profit that can be obtained by entering a game ball (for example, a prize given by entering one game ball) is increased to the second Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is unlikely to be in the second state, the game ball that has flowed down is likely to enter the second variable ball entrance on the downstream side. , In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the variable starting port on the upstream side. As a result, the player expects that the ball will enter the second variable ball entry opening, which will bring more game profit than the variable starting opening, and that the second special game will occur in the first game state. , increase the interest in gaming. In addition, as a result, it is possible to differentiate the obtainable game profits between the first game state and the second game state when the same second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest. becomes.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4,
The game state is not changed based on the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are set to the same game state. Thus, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the second special game is executed in the first game state. By generating a game, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-2 to 4-5,
Said 1st special game is a jackpot game, and said 2nd special game is characterized by being a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big win game, and the second special game is a small win game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
and first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port,
It is characterized in that the first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting hole and the identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting hole are displayed in parallel. (Simultaneously) variable display is enabled. As a result, in a simultaneous variation game machine (simultaneous variation machine) capable of variably displaying the first identification information and the identification information in parallel (simultaneously), it is possible to diversify the game while providing smooth progress of the game. do.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to diversify game characteristics and improve game interest while enabling smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
In addition, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), as a game state, it has a plurality of game states, and with the execution of a jackpot game as a trigger, from a normal state to a probability variable state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It has become a game machine that transitions. In addition, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are variably displayed a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is returned to. Such a game machine exhibits a certain effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game by changing the game state.

However, in the game machine of Patent Document 1 and the conventional game machines, the mode of transition between game states and the game state after transition are uniform, and the amusement of the game has not been enhanced. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the gameplay and enhances the interest in the game by giving a feature to the transition mode of the game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
Having a first identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. The game state is changed to the high-probability first game state when the number of times of display reaches a specific number.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with a high probability, in the second game state with a high probability, the number of times of changing display of the first identification information and the second identification information is When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
Having a second identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. Also, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the second game state with a high probability when the specified number of times has passed during the execution of the common presentation, and can enhance the game interest. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2,
The high probability and the first game state is characterized in that the obtainable game profit is larger than that of the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, and increases the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged upstream of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged downstream of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game amusement.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the first special game is completed,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 5, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
A gaming machine comprising a shooting device for shooting game balls into a game area with a predetermined shooting intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area where a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
Having a first identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state,
Not having the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting hole.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing strength, and the second starting port is provided in the second game region where the ball can be entered with the second firing strength. . Then, when the first identification result is reached, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, in the high probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information When the number of times of the variable display reaches a specific number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. In addition, it does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, but has the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. As a result, it is possible to provide different game properties depending on whether the game ball is entered into the first start hole or the second start hole, thereby diversifying the game properties and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be increased.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
Having a second identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability , by executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on the ball entering the second starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information in the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the specific number of times is reached, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the playability and enhance the game interest. In addition, as a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the specific number of times has passed during the execution of the common performance, and can enhance the game interest. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
Having a third identification result as the identification result,
When the third specified result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first game state, and the game state does not change until the next specified result is obtained in the game state. and
The third identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, it has the second identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the game state after the special game ends with the third specified result is set to the first game state with a high probability, the game state is maintained at the first game state with a high probability until the next specified result. It is assumed that As a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no change from the high-probability second game state to the first game state based on the specific number of times of variable display, and the special game ends. It guarantees the game state of the first game state with a high probability until the next specific result is obtained. In addition, as a result, in a game involving the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, diversify the game characteristics, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The high probability and the first game state is characterized in that the obtainable game profit is larger than that of the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged upstream of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged downstream of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game amusement.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-5,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the first special game is completed,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 6, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
Having a first identification result and a fourth identification result as the identification result,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the high probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state,
When the fourth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state changes to the high probability and the first game state.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with a high probability as a result of the first identification, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the second game state with a high probability. When the number of times of the fluctuation display reaches the first number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. Further, when the fourth identification result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display reaches the second number, the game state changes from the second game state with a high probability to the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

In this aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information becomes the first number of times or the second number of times, the game state is changed from the second game state to the second game state with a high probability and at a high probability. 1 game state shall be changed. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the first identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the second identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the game state is changed to the second game state with a high probability. to the first game state with a high probability. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times of variable display of the second identification information, when the number of times of variable display of the first identification information becomes the first number or the second number, the game state is changed to the second game with a high probability. It may be changed from the state to the first game state with high probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
having a second identification result and a fifth identification result as the identification result,
When the second identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the fifth identification result is reached, the game state after the special game ends is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and in the game state, the first identification information and the second identification information change. When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the game state changes to the first game state with the predetermined probability,
When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, and when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the high probability By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the game state is the second game state with the predetermined probability or the second game state with the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, when the second specific result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the second game state with the predetermined probability, in the second game state with the predetermined probability, the first When the number of times of variable display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. Further, when the fifth identification result is obtained and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display reaches the second number, the game state changes from the second game state with a predetermined probability to the first game state with a predetermined probability. In addition, by executing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appearing, the same mode, etc.) in the second game state with a predetermined probability and the second game state with a high probability, the player can However, it is difficult to recognize whether it is a predetermined probability and the second game state or a high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the change timing of the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game. In addition, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability when the first number of times and the second number of times have passed during the execution of the common presentation, It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The possibility that the game state changes to the first game state with the high probability is higher in the case where the game state changes in the second number than in the case where the game state changes in the first number. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is larger than the first number of times, and the game state is higher when the game state change timing is the second number than when the game state is changed the first time. The probability and possibility of changing to the first game state are high. Thus, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game expecting that the game state is maintained without changing, and the second number of times is reached while the game state remains the second game state. In some cases, the game is played with a high probability and an increased expectation for the change to the first game state. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point of increasing the sense of anticipation for multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify game characteristics and enhance game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number of times is a larger number than the first number of times,
The possibility that the game state changes to the first game state with the high probability is higher in the case where the game state changes in the first number than in the case where the game state changes in the second number. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the second number of times is larger than the first number of times, and the game state is higher when the game state change timing is the first number of times than when the game state change timing is the second number of times. The probability and possibility of changing to the first game state are high. As a result, when the player reaches the first number of times, the player plays the game expecting that the game state will change, and when the game reaches the second number of times while the game state remains the second game state, the player can The game is played with the expectation that the state will change to the first game state with a high probability although the probability is lower than that of the first number of times. As a result, in the second game state, there is a point of increasing the sense of anticipation for multiple times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the playability and increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4,
The high probability and the first game state is characterized in that the obtainable game profit is larger than that of the high probability and the second game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high-probability first game state than in the high-probability second game state. As a result, the player expects that the game state will change to the first game state with a high probability after the specific number of times has passed, and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-5,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged on the downstream side of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance depending on the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game amusement.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-4,
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game is capable of changing the game state after the first special game is completed,
The second special game shall not change the game state after the second special game is completed,
The first variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state in the first special game, and the second variable ball-inlet is in a ball-enterable state in the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the first special game is finished. In addition, the second special game in which the second variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state shall not change the game state after the second special game is finished. That is, the game state before execution of the second special game and the game state after execution of the second special game are the same game state. As a result, when the high probability and the first game state are reached, the high probability and the first game state continue even after the execution of the second special game in the high probability and the first game state, so that the second special game is performed multiple times. By generating it, it becomes possible to acquire more game profits.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gameplay and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the game machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance capable of changing between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information will be a specific result;
a first condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition; and a second condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition; A gaming machine comprising a second identification information change time determination means capable of setting
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display of the determined second identification information is shorter than in the first condition state,
As game states, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state, the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the first It is characterized by having a two-condition state, and the high-probability and second game state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, the probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the second and a second identification information change time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which an average time of change display time of the two identification information is shorter than that of the first condition state. In addition, as the game state, a predetermined probability and first game state and first condition state, a predetermined probability and second game state and second condition state, a high probability and first game state and second condition state, and a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state. In the game state in which the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition state is set. In the game state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
A case where the variable display of the second identification information results in a specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than a case where the variable display of the first identification information results in a specific result. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing, or increase the possibility of being in an advantageous state after the special game ends. be. As a result, the player expects to be set in a state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be frequently performed, that is, in the second condition state in which the time for variable display of the second identification information is relatively short. You will be playing the game. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a third start port into which a game ball can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on the ball entering the third starting hole.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the third starting port is provided for variably displaying the second identification information based on the entry of the game ball. As a result, the second identification information is variably displayed when the ball is entered into either the variable second start hole or the third start hole, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area in which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second starting port, said first variable ball entrance, and said second variable ball entrance are a second game in which a game ball launched at said second launch intensity different from said first launch intensity can enter. provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is shot into the first game area so that the first identification information is variably displayed and the game is played. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. In the two-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area, and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball-entering port and the second variable ball-entering port are , is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Also, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and displaying the second identification information in a variable manner. That is, when the first condition state is established, the game ball is shot to the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game, and when the second condition state is established, the game ball is shot to the second game area. A game is played by shooting the second identification information and displaying the second identification information.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the game is played in anticipation of setting the second conditional state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area in which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second start port, said third start port, said first variable ball entry port, and said second variable ball entry port enter a game ball fired at a second launch intensity different from said first launch intensity. provided in the possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is shot into the first game area so that the first identification information is variably displayed and the game is played. ,
The game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. In the two-condition state, the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area, and the game is played.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starter is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing strength, and the second starter, the third starter, the first variable ball inlet and the second starter are provided. The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second launch intensity. When the game state is the first game state and the first condition state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot into the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. Also, when the game state is a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second game state and a second condition state, A game is played by shooting a game ball into the second game area and variably displaying the second identification information. That is, when the first condition state is established, the game ball is shot to the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game, and when the second condition state is established, the game ball is shot to the second game area. The game is played by shooting the second identification information and displaying the second identification information.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the game is played in anticipation of setting the second conditional state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner. Become. In addition, even in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, and it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the playability, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-5,
A game profit that can be obtained is larger in the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state than in the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the game profit that can be obtained is greater in the high-probability first game state and second condition state than in the high-probability second game state and second condition state. there is As a result, the player advances the game expecting that the game state will be set to the first game state and the second condition state with a high probability, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-6,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state, the game ball is entered into the second start port arranged on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second start port By making it difficult for a ball to enter the second variable ball entrance arranged on the downstream side, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance is increased to the high probability and the second game. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are made higher than the state and the second condition state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are the high probability and the second condition state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is higher than in the game state and the second condition state. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 8, it is possible to diversify the amusement and improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 9)
In addition, the game machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-unenterable state in which a game ball cannot enter;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
first identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port;
second identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than that in the first game state. configurable game state setting means;
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information becomes a specific result, a special game is executed in which the first variable ball entrance or the second variable ball entrance is in a state where a ball can be entered. a game execution means;
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as probabilities that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the game state, there are the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, and the high probability and the second game state. death,
The second variable ball entrance is characterized in that when the game state becomes the high probability and the first game state, the frequency of game ball entry increases.

Such a gaming machine comprises game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, and probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. In addition, as the game state, there are a first game state with a predetermined probability, a second game state with a predetermined probability, a first game state with a high probability, and a second game state with a high probability. It is assumed that when the probability is high and the first game state is reached, the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance becomes high. As a result, the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the first game state with a high probability. Moreover, as a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
Equipped with a launcher for launching game balls into a game area with a predetermined launch intensity,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a game ball fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
Said second starting port, said first variable ball entrance, and said second variable ball entrance are a second game area into which a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from said first firing intensity can enter. provided in
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, by shooting a game ball into the first game area, the first identification information is variably displayed and a game is played,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is shot to the second game area. Thus, a gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a game state in which a game is played while the second identification information is variably displayed by shooting a game ball into the second game area,
The frequency of entering the game ball into the second variable ball entrance is higher than the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state than the high probability and the second game state. is characterized by being higher.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered with the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable ball-entering port and the second variable ball-entering port are , is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered with the second firing intensity. When the game state is the first game state with a predetermined probability, the game ball is shot to the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play the game. In addition, when the game state is the second game state with a predetermined probability, the first game state with a high probability, or the second game state with a high probability, the game ball is shot into the second game area and the second identification information is issued. The game is played with variable display. In addition, in the game state in which the game is played by shooting the game ball in the second game area, that is, the second game state with a predetermined probability, the first game state with a high probability, and the second game state with a high probability, the second A game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable ball entrance is the highest is defined as a high-probability first game state.

As a result, when the player enters a game state in which the game ball is shot into the second game area and the game is played, the player advances the game expecting that the game state is the first game state with a high probability. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game state, diversify the game property, and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port,
In the high probability and the second game state, the game ball is entered into the second start hole arranged on the upstream side of the game area, and the second start hole is arranged on the downstream side of the second start hole. By making it difficult to enter a ball into the variable ball entrance, the possibility of a game ball entering the second variable ball entrance when the second special game occurs is increased to the high probability and the second ball entrance. It is characterized in that the high probability and the first game state are made higher than the game state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable ball entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starter opening arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (opened state), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entry opening arranged on the downstream side. As a result, when the second variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state is higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance is high. Further, this makes it possible to vary the frequency of ball entry into the second variable ball entrance according to the game state when the second special game occurs, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game interest.

According to the game machine of this reference invention 9, it is possible to diversify the game characteristics and improve the game interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game in which a predetermined profit can be awarded to the player can be executed. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects are performed to increase the player's sense of anticipation during the variable display of the identification information, thereby improving the amusement of the game. As such effects, for example, information related to the currently executed identification information variable display and subsequent identification information variable display (for example, the degree of expectation (reliability) that the display result will be the specific display result, the display There is known an effect that displays (announces) a variation (effect) mode, etc., until a result is derived (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-239122).

However, the effect performed during the variable display of the identification information as described above has already been adopted in many game machines, and the effect mode is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to increase the interest in games. The present reference invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to realize an effect that can attract the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information. , to improve amusement.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
variable display means capable of variable display of identification information;
a state control means capable of controlling a game state when the identification information is variably displayed;
a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result;
an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect of displaying information about a game after the end of the variable display of the identification information during the variable display of the identification information;
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game will be executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current game state will be continued even after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the game state will become more disadvantageous than the current game state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect executing means is capable of displaying at least two of the first to third information when starting the information display effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the variable display is executed during the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is performed at the start of the information display effect. First information indicating that the special game will be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state will be continued even after the end of the variable display, and after the end of the variable display, the game state will be changed from the current state. It is possible to display at least two pieces of information out of the third information indicating that the player will be in a disadvantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess about the subsequent development of the game based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 described above,
The information display effect executing means may display the first information and the second information or may display the second information and the third information when starting the information display effect. and

According to such a gaming machine, when the information display effect is started, there are cases where the first information and the second information are displayed, and cases where the second information and the third information are displayed. Therefore, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can presume that there is no possibility that the subsequent development of the game will be disadvantageous. If the information and the third information are displayed, the possibility that the subsequent development of the game will be disadvantageous cannot be ruled out. As a result, it is possible to obtain a performance effect that arouses expectations and anxiety of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above,
The special game includes at least a first special game and a second special game,
The game state has at least a first game state and a second game state,
Said second special game is a special game with more game profit that can be given than said first special game,
The second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state,
The state control means controls the game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls the game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect executing means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game will be executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second game state will continue even after the end of the variable display,
The third information is characterized in that the game state changes to the first game state after the end of the variable display.

According to such a gaming machine, as the special game, it has at least the first special game and the second special game, and as the game state, it has at least the first game state and the second game state, and the second special game. The game is a special game in which more game profits can be obtained than in the first special game, and the second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Also, the game state after the first special game ends is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game ends is the second game state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state). The information indicates that the current second game state will be continued even after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the game state will change to the first game state. Therefore, by the information display effect, the information (game development) regarding the game after the game in the second game state (variation display of the identification information) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the game interest in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above,
Equipped with variable performance execution means capable of executing variable performance during variable display of identification information,
The variable effect executing means can execute a variable effect based on a predetermined variable effect pattern,
The variable performance pattern includes at least a first variable performance pattern, a second variable performance pattern and a third variable performance pattern,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, the variable performance based on the first variable performance pattern can be executed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and the first special game can be executed, the variable performance based on the second variable performance pattern can be executed during the variable display,
when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, the variable performance based on the third variable performance pattern can be executed during the variable display;
The information display effect executing means
The first information and the second information can be displayed when the variable performance based on the first variable performance pattern is executed and when the variable performance based on the third variable performance pattern is executed,
The second information and the third information can be displayed when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a variable performance based on a predetermined variable performance pattern during the variable display of the identification information. It has a pattern and a third variation performance pattern. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, the variable display of the identification information is displayed while the variable performance based on the first variable performance pattern is displayed during the variable display. When the result becomes the specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, the variable performance based on the second variable performance pattern is performed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In this case, it is possible to execute the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern during the variable display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable performance based on the first variable performance pattern is executed and when the variable performance based on the third variable performance pattern is executed, the information is displayed in the variable display. It is possible to display the first information and the second information at the start of the performance, and when the variable performance based on the second variable performance pattern is executed, the second information is displayed at the start of the information display performance in the variable display. It is possible to display the second information and the third information. Therefore, when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the information display effect of displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. As a result, it is possible to match the information display effect executed during the variable display of the identification information with the variable effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-4 described above,
The information display effect executing means is characterized in that, after the information display effect is started, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the display mode of the information can be changed by the information display effect. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the variable display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the game develops after that by the display mode of the subsequent information. This makes it possible to attract the interest of the player to the information display effect even after the information display effect is started.

According to the tenth reference invention described above, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the player's interest as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 11)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the display result of the variability display becomes a specific display result, a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded to the player can be executed. is widely known. In this type of game machine, it is common to display identification information in a variable manner and perform various effects in accordance with the progress of a game such as a special game. In such a game machine, there is a game machine in which an effect (reach effect, etc.) indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result is performed as a character effect by a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-154657).

However, many game machines have already adopted a configuration in which a character effect is performed by a ready-to-win effect or the like, and the execution mode thereof is also uniform. For this reason, it is becoming difficult to increase the interest in games. The present reference invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the game interest of a game machine equipped with character presentation by giving characteristics to the execution mode of character presentation. That's what it is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
variable display means capable of variable display of identification information;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result;
A gaming machine comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The production executing means is
As the production, it is possible to execute a character production by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there are cases where the character production is executed with the variable display of the identification information and where the character production is executed with the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the character presentation by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit may be executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, or may be executed in accordance with the special game. As a result, it is possible to associate the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information with the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 described above,
Equipped with a state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a game state to a specific game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed,
When the specific game state is entered, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display section in the specific game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state when the variable display of the identification information is performed becomes the specific game state, the predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed by the variable display of the identification information. There is a case where it is executed along with the special game, and a case where it is executed along with the special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above,
having a first specific display result and a second specific display result as the specific display result;
As the special game, it has a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the second specific display result,
The first special game has more game profits that can be given than the second special game,
The production executing means is
when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game can be executed, a character presentation is executed in accordance with the variable display;
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character presentation is executed along with the second special game. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game is executed in which the game profit that can be awarded to the player is relatively large. When it becomes possible, a character effect is executed along with the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game becomes executable, the character presentation is executed along with the second special game. As a result, when the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) is performed, or when the second special game is performed, the game interest is enhanced. can be increased.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 described above,
a first variable ball entrance that can change between a state in which a game ball cannot be entered and a state in which a game ball can be entered;
a second variable ball entrance capable of changing between a state in which a game ball cannot be entered and a state in which a game ball can be entered;
In the first special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first variable ball entrance,
In the second special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable ball entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The production executing means is
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character presentation is executed in accordance with the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the specific game state becomes the second specific display result and the second special game can be executed, a character presentation is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game that is executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the entry of the game ball into the first variable ball entrance is In the second special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second variable ball entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of the game balls entering the second variable ball entrance associated with the second special game is higher than in the game states other than the specific game state. As a result, the second variable input associated with the second special game can be executed under a situation where the variable display of the identification information that triggers the execution of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result) can be executed. The player's interest is attracted to the entry of the game ball into the ball opening and the execution of the character presentation, and the game amusement in the specific game state can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
Said 1st special game is a jackpot game, and said 2nd special game is a small hit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big win game, and the second special game is a small win game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game of the gaming machine having the big winning game and the small winning game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-3 to 11-5 described above,
a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result;
A display result of the variable display of the identification information has a probability that the second specific display result is higher than the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the first specific display result (the execution probability of the first special game) is a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, can be set, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game will be executed is increased, and accordingly the possibility of execution of the character presentation associated with the second special game is also increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game when the second special game is played.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

According to such a gaming machine, in the specific game state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result is high, so the possibility of executing the character presentation accompanying the second special game It is possible to attract the player's interest to the execution of the character presentation accompanying the variable display of the identification information under the condition that the identification information is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the specific game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-7 described above,
having a first character and a second character as characters displayed on the predetermined display unit;
The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect,
The first character effect is a effect including a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is a effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The production executing means is
When executing a character effect with the variable display of the identification information, executing the first character effect,
The second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display section, and the character presentation is executed by the first character and the second character. The character production includes a first character production and a second character production, and the first character production is a first production by the first character and the second character, and a first production by the first character and the second character after the first production. The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character, but does not include the second effect. Then, the first character performance is executed when the character performance is executed with the variable display of the identification information, and the second character performance is executed when the character performance is executed with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character presentation in a mode suitable for the game situation, and to attract the player's interest in the character presentation.

According to the eleventh aspect of the invention described above, it is possible to improve the game interest of a gaming machine equipped with a character presentation by giving a feature to the execution mode of the character presentation.

(Reference Invention 12)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and that enables execution of a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. Are known. Among game machines of this type, there are those having a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other displays (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-240381).

In a gaming machine having a plurality of display means as described above, the player proceeds with the game while paying attention to the display contents of each display means. However, the configuration having a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many game machines, and the manner of display by a plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to increase the amusement of this type of game machine. The present reference invention 12 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its object is to provide a feature in the form of display by a plurality of display means, and to enhance the game interest of a game machine equipped with a plurality of display means. The goal is to improve.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of variable display of identification information becoming a specific display result,
a first display means;
a second display means;
variable display start means capable of starting variable display of identification information on the first display means based on establishment of a predetermined variable start condition;
a suggestive display execution means capable of executing a suggestive display suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific display result,
The suggestive display executing means can execute the suggestive display on at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

According to such a game machine, when a predetermined variable start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific display result. At least one of the first display means and the second display means can perform the suggestive display. As a result, in addition to the variable display of the identification information on the first display means, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestive display by the first display means and the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 described above,
Equipped with a game board on which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board and the second display means is provided outside the game area, a wide range of display is provided inside and outside the game area. becomes possible. This enables suggestive display with impact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 described above,
The second display means comprises a left display means located on the left game area side of the game areas and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game areas,
The suggestive display executing means can execute the suggestive display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means when the suggestive display is executed by the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, first display means provided inside the game area, left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the side of the left game area, and At least one of the three display means, ie, the right display means (second display means) provided on the right side of the game area outside of, can perform the suggestive display. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of suggestive displays and enhance interest in the case where the suggestive displays are performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 described above,
The suggestive display execution means is characterized in that, when the suggestive display is executed by the second display means, the suggestive display can be executed in different modes between the left display means and the right display means.

According to such a game machine, since it is possible to execute suggestive displays in different modes on the left display means and the right display means, suggestive displays are executed by the left display means and suggestive displays are executed by the right display means. It is possible to draw the player's attention to each of them. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectations of the player.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-4 described above,
It is characterized by further comprising predetermined display executing means capable of executing another predetermined display on the second display means when the suggestive display executing means does not execute the suggestive display on the second display means.

According to such a game machine, when the suggestive display is not executed by the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed by the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-5 described above,
a specific display executing means capable of executing a specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display is a specific display result after starting the variable display of the identification information;
The specific display executing means may execute the specific display on the first display means or may execute the specific display on the first display means and the second display means. be.

According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the specific display indicating whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is displayed on the first display means. In some cases, it is executed in the first display means and in other cases, it is executed by the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of specific displays and enhance interest when the specific displays are performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 12-1 to 12-6 described above,
comprising stop display executing means capable of executing display of the stop identification information when stopping the variable display of the identification information,
The stop display executing means may display the stop identification information on the first display means, or display the stop identification information on the first display means and the second display means. It is characterized by

According to such a game machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped may be executed by the first display means. , may be executed by the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variety of display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to increase the interest when the stop identification information is displayed.

According to the twelfth aspect of the invention described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a game in a game machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving characteristics to the mode of display by a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 for solving the problem related to Reference Invention 12 described above,
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of variable display of identification information becoming a specific display result,
a first display means;
a second display means;
variable display start means capable of starting variable display of identification information on the first display means based on establishment of a predetermined variable start condition;
an effect display executing means capable of executing an effect display related to the variable display of the identification information;
The effect display executing means may execute the effect display by the first display means or may execute the effect display by the first display means and the second display means. be.

According to such a game machine, when the predetermined variable start condition is established, the variable display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the effect display related to the variable display of the identification information is executed by the first display means. In some cases, it is executed by the first display means and in other cases by the second display means. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, triggered by the start of the variable display of the identification information on the first display means.

Note that the "effect display related to the variable display" is, for example, a effect display that changes the background when performing the variable display of the identification information, or an effect that indicates whether or not the result of the variable display is the specific display result. It refers to various presentation displays related to variable display of identification information, such as display and presentation that suggests the possibility that the result of the variable display will be the specific display result.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 described above,
Modes in which the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means include a first mode in which the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning, and a mode in which the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. and a second aspect of executing on the first display means and then executing on the second display means,
When the effect display execution means executes the effect display by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display based on the first mode and the second display are performed before the variable display of the identification information is completed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute either one of the effects display based on the mode.

According to such a game machine, as a mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. and a second mode in which the effect display is initially performed by the first display means and the effect display is performed later by the second display means. When the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, either the effect display based on the first mode or the effect display based on the second mode is completed before the variable display of the identification information is completed. Either one can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance display related to the variable display from becoming uniform, thereby increasing interest in the case where the performance display related to the variable display is performed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 described above,
The effect display based on the second mode is characterized in that the display area of the effect display executed by the first display means spreads step by step to the second display means. be.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second mode, that is, the effect display is executed by the first display means at first, and then the effect display is executed by the second display means as well. When the effect display is executed, the effect display is such that the display area of the effect display on the first display means spreads step by step to the second display means. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect such that the display area of the effect display gradually expands from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to increase interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed. Become.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 13-1 to 13-3 described above,
Equipped with a game board on which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, since the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board and the second display means is provided outside the game area, a wide range of display is provided inside and outside the game area. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to perform an impactful presentation display.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 described above,
The second display means comprises a left display means located on the left game area side of the game areas and a right display means located on the right game area side of the game areas,
The effect display executing means can execute the effect display by at least one of the left display means and the right display means when the effect display is executed by the second display means.

According to such a gaming machine, first display means provided inside the game area, left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the side of the left game area, and Effect display can be executed by one of the three display means, ie, the right display means (second display means) provided outside and on the right game area side. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance the interest in the case where the effect display is performed.

According to Reference Invention 13 described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a game in a game machine provided with a plurality of display means by giving characteristics to the mode of display by a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 14)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and that enables execution of a special game advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. Are known. In this type of game machine, the frame body (front frame) that constitutes the outer shell of the game machine is provided with performance means such as movable accessories (gimmicks), LEDs, speakers, performance displays, etc., and these performance means are used to progress the game. There is a device that enhances the presentation effect by driving together (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-195934).

However, in providing the effect means to the frame of the game machine, for example, the relationship with the island equipment (CR unit, data display device, etc.) where the game machine is installed, other game machines installed adjacently, The opening and closing of the frame must be taken into consideration, and it is usually accompanied by restrictions due to them. For this reason, in a game machine in which the effect means is provided in the frame, the installation mode of the effect means tends to be uniform, and the current situation is that the machine lacks novelty. The present reference invention 14 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of imparting a characteristic to the installation mode of the effect means and making the player feel novelty. It is in.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
a game board having a game area formed on its front surface;
A front frame having a viewing window that covers the front surface of the game board and allows the game area to be viewed from the front,
The front frame is provided so that it can be opened and closed by being pivotally supported at one side end thereof,
A first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the one side end side of the front surface of the front frame so as to be rotatable between the front side of the front frame and the viewing window side. It is.

According to such a game machine, the front frame that covers the front surface of the game board is pivotally supported at one end of the front frame so that it can be opened and closed (rotatably) around the axis of the one end. . A first frame-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is rotatable between the front surface of the front frame and the viewing window side of the front frame on one side end side where the front frame is pivotally supported. is provided in The viewing window of the front frame, which allows the user to visually recognize the game area formed on the front surface of the game board, is located inside (central side) of the front frame rather than one side end of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported. By rotating the first frame side display means toward the visual window side when opening the front frame, the first frame side display means can be housed in the visual window side (inside the front frame). Further, when closing the front frame, the first frame side display means is rotated in the opposite direction (one side end side of the front frame) to when the front frame is opened. can be restored to its original state. Therefore, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one end side of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is pivotally supported, opening and closing of the front frame will not be hindered. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode in which the display means (first frame side display means) is provided on one end side of the front frame which is pivotally supported. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that can give a sense of novelty that has not existed in the past.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-1 described above,
The first frame side display means is configured such that when it is in an initial state in which it is not rotated toward the viewing window side, its display surface is visible from the front and inclined toward the viewing window side,
It is characterized by comprising maintenance means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state.

According to such a game machine, when the first frame side display means is in the initial state in which it is not rotated toward the visual window side, the display surface thereof can be viewed from the front and is inclined toward the visual window side. , and the first frame side display means can be maintained in that state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame side display means is inclined toward the viewing window side, the player playing the game while viewing the game area through the viewing window can display the first frame side display means with a small movement of the line of sight. It becomes possible to visually recognize the surface (display content), and by keeping the first frame side display means in such a state (initial state), it is possible to play the game with the front frame closed. It is possible to ensure good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame side display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-2 described above,
The maintaining means is configured by biasing means for biasing the first frame side display means toward the one side end.

According to such a game machine, the maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state urges the first frame side display means toward the one side end side (the side supported by the front frame). It is composed of an urging means for Therefore, by rotating the first frame side display means toward the viewing window side, the initial state of the first frame side display means is released, and by releasing the rotation toward the viewing window side, the first frame side display means , and is urged toward one end of the front frame by the action of the urging means (maintaining means) to return to the initial state. Thereby, when the first frame side display means is not rotated toward the viewing window side, the first frame side display means can be automatically brought to the initial state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 14-1 to 14-3 described above,
A second frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other side end side of the front face of the front frame facing the one side end side.

According to such a game machine, the second frame side display capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other side end side facing the one side end side provided with the first frame side display means in the front surface of the front frame. Means are provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine having a novel frame body (front frame) in which display means are arranged on both sides of one side end and the other side end of the front frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 described above,
The display surface of the second frame side display means is configured to be visible from the front and inclined toward the viewing window side.

According to such a game machine, the display surface of the second frame side display means is configured to be visible from the front and inclined toward the viewing window side. As a result, a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the game area through the viewing window can visually recognize the display surface (display content) of the second frame side display means with a small line of sight movement, similarly to the first frame side display means. It becomes possible to

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 14-1 to 14-5 described above,
A board-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image and visible from the front through the viewing window is provided on the back side of the game board.

According to such a game machine, a board-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board-side display means is visible from the front through the viewing window of the front frame. It is said that As a result, various displays using the frame side display means provided on the front side of the front frame (outside the game area) and the board side display means provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area) are possible. It is possible to enhance amusement in the game.

According to the reference invention 14 described above, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of making the installation mode of the effect means unique and making the player feel novelty.

(Reference Invention 15)
In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. showed the potential to do so. Also, as the big wins, there are a plurality of big wins that are comparatively advantageous to the player and comparatively disadvantageous big wins. In addition, as game effects (ready-to-win effects, character effects, etc.), a plurality of game effects with different execution modes (performance modes) are provided, and different game effects indicate different degrees of reliability for big hits. As a result, the player's interest in the game is heightened when the game performance with high reliability of the big win is executed, and the interest in the game is further heightened when the big win is advantageous.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a game performance with high reliability of a big hit is executed, the game interest is enhanced, but when the game performance results in a relatively disadvantageous jackpot for the player, the game interest is increased. There was a risk of a decline. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of increasing a sense of security in a game and executing a game performance that enhances the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state;
a game state setting means capable of setting a game state after the special game ends to a first game state and a second game state;
with
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
The game effects include a first special game effect and a second special game effect different from the first special game effect,
The first game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state,
As effect modes suggesting a predetermined game state, a first effect mode suggesting the first game state and a second effect mode suggesting the second game state are provided,
When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, when continuing the first effect mode without executing the special game, and after executing the special game and finishing the special game and setting the production mode to the second production mode,
When the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the first effect mode; and the special game is executed. It has a case of continuing the first effect mode without playing, and does not have a case of executing the special game and setting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. and

According to such a gaming machine, as the effect modes suggesting the game state, the first effect mode suggesting the first game state and the second effect mode suggesting the second game state are provided, The first game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Also, as game effects that can be executed in the first effect mode, there are a first special game effect in which a specific character appears, and a second special game effect that is different from the first special game effect. Then, when the first special game effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and when the special game is executed and the relevant There is a case where the performance mode after the end of the special game is set to the second performance mode. Further, when the second special game effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the first effect mode. , There are times when the first game mode is continued without executing the special game, and the performance mode is not set to the second performance mode.

Thus, when the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode suggesting the first game state relatively advantageous to the player, the effect mode does not shift to the second effect mode. , the player can play the game with a sense of security. Also, when the second special game effect is executed, the first effect mode continues even after the special game is executed, or the first effect mode continues even if the special game is not executed. , the player can play the game with anticipation. Also, even when the first special game effect that may shift to the second effect mode is executed, the special game is not executed, but the first effect mode may continue, so the player's expectation It is possible to maintain the feeling of the game and prevent the decline in the interest in the game as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1,
Execution of the first special game effect in the first effect mode is a condition for the effect mode to shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.

According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode is set to the first effect mode suggesting the first game state advantageous to the player, the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode. is set as a transition condition to the second effect mode. As a result, since the production mode does not shift from the first production mode to the second production mode without going through the first special game production, the player when the game production other than the first special game production is executed It is possible to provide a sharp game by increasing the sense of security of the player and increasing the tension when the first special game performance is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-1 or Reference Invention 15-2,
The identification results include a first identification result and a second identification result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first identification result,
Having a third game state as the game state,
The second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the third game state,
As the production mode, having a third production mode suggesting the third game state,
In the first special game effect, a specific character appears,
The game effect includes a third special game effect in which the specific character appears,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specified result, the specified result is the third 1 specific result.

According to such a gaming machine, as the specific result for executing the special game, it has the first specific result and the second specific result that is more disadvantageous than the first specific result, and the game state is the second specific result. It has a third game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state. In addition, as a production mode, there is a third production mode that suggests a third game state, and as a game production that can be executed in the third production mode, a specific character that appears in common with the character that appears in the first special game production appears. It has a third special game effect to play. Then, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, the specific result is the first specific result advantageous to the player. .

As a result, in the first effect mode, the first special game effect in which a specific character having a disadvantageous result appears even when the specific result is obtained, and in the third effect mode, a third special game in which a similar specific character appears. The performance is set to a game performance that gives an advantageous result when a specific result is obtained. That is, depending on the presentation mode, game presentations in which the same specific character appears are game presentations with different values for the player. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game and increase the interest in the game by varying the expectation for the game performance in which the same specific character appears depending on the performance mode.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 15-3,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specified result, after the special game ends The game state is set to the first game state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specified result, the game state after the special game ends is changed to the first It shall be set to the game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the value of the third special game effect in the third effect mode and to increase the expectation of the player when the third special game effect in which the specific character appears in the third effect mode is executed. becomes. In addition, this makes it possible to further differentiate expectations for a game performance in which the same specific character appears depending on the performance mode, prevent the player from becoming bored with the game, and increase the interest in the game. Also, the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode suggesting the first game state.

When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode. Further, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect is performed without executing the special game and shifting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. , may have a plurality of types. Also, "when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect that does not shift the effect mode after the special game is executed and the special game is completed to the second effect mode. ' is 'when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed and the effect mode after the special game ends may be shifted to the second effect mode. It may be greater than the number of "game effects".

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that enhances a player's sense of security and executes a game effect that enhances amusement in the game.

(Reference Invention 16)
In a conventional gaming machine, although the amount of winning balls obtained during consecutive games is displayed, it was difficult for the player to easily grasp the amount of game profit obtained in different periods. As a result, there is a possibility that the amusement of the game may be lowered. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that allows a player to easily grasp the amount of game profit that has been obtained and that can prevent the loss of interest in the game. is.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
an identification information display unit that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
a first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of gaming profit obtained in the first period;
a second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit earned in a second period longer than the first period;
a first display device capable of displaying predetermined game information about a game; (sub-liquid crystal)
a second display device provided separately from the first display device and capable of displaying predetermined game information related to a game (main liquid crystal);
The first display device is provided with the first profit information display section, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first profit information display section capable of displaying the profit information indicating the amount of the game profit obtained in the first period and the amount of the game profit obtained in the second period longer than the first period are provided. a second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount, wherein the first profit information display unit is provided in the first display device, and the second display device is provided separately from the first display device. A profit information display section is provided. This makes it possible to display the game profits obtained in different lengths of time on different display devices. Further, as a result, the player confirms the first display device when he/she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the first period, and the second display device when he/she wants to confirm the game profit obtained in the second period. Since it is only necessary to confirm it, it becomes easy to grasp the game profit obtained during a desired period.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1,
A gaming machine that executes a game by shooting gaming balls into a gaming area,
The first display device is provided outside the game area,
The second display device is provided inside the game area,
The first profit information display section is provided on the first display device, and the second profit information display section and the identification information display section are provided on the second display device in a predetermined gaming situation. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined game situation, the first display device provided with the first profit information display section is provided outside the game area, and the second profit information display section and the identification information display section are provided. A second display device is provided inside the game area. As a result, the player plays the game while confirming the identification information and the game profit obtained in the second period on the second display device provided in the inner area of the game area, and confirms the game profit obtained in the first period. In this case, it is possible to confirm by looking at the first display device provided in the outer area of the game area. In addition, as a result, the first display device and the second display device are clearly separated from each other in the inner and outer regions of the game area, so that the player can obtain the desired period (first period or second period). It becomes possible to grasp the game profit easily and surely.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 or Reference Invention 16-2,
If multiple special games occur during the second period,
The first period is a period including one special game,
The second period is characterized by being a period including the plurality of special games.

According to such a gaming machine, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, the first period is a period including only one special game, and the second period is a period including the special game. It is a period that includes all of the special games of the time. Thus, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, the profit information including the total amount of the game profit obtained in the special game is displayed in the second profit information display section. In the 1-profit information display portion, profit information including the game profit obtained in one special game is displayed. As a result, the player can easily and reliably grasp the game profit obtained during the desired period (first period or second period).

In addition, the "period including one special game" may be the first period during which only one special game is executed, or in addition to the execution period of one special game, after the end of the special game. The first period may include the predetermined game state (excluding the special game). Similarly, in the "period including multiple times of special games", only the execution period of multiple times of special games may be the second period, or in addition to the execution period of multiple times of special games, The second period may include a game state during the special game and a predetermined game state (excluding the special game) after the last special game of the plurality of special games.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 16-1 to 16-3,
As game states, there are a first game state (high-probability-low base state) and a second game state (low-probability-low base state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The second period starts when the special game is executed, and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game,
In the second period, when the special game occurs a plurality of times, a plurality of the first profit information display portions are provided.

According to such a gaming machine, as game states, it has a relatively advantageous first game state and a relatively disadvantageous second game state, and a special game is executed during the second period. It starts and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game. Then, when the special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of first profit information display portions for displaying the profit information acquired during the period including one special game are provided. That is, when the special game occurs multiple times in the second period, it is possible to provide the first profit information display portion corresponding to each special game. As a result, the player can grasp the total amount of game profit obtained in the second period, and can grasp how much game profit has been obtained in the first period including each special game. . It should be noted that only one second profit information display section for displaying the profit information obtained in the second period may be provided.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 16-1 to 16-4,
a second special game executing means capable of executing a second special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a second specified result;
The first game state is a game state in which a game profit can be obtained by executing the second special game,
The first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game,
The first profit information display unit displays profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first special game and the amount of game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the first game state is a game state in which a game profit can be obtained by executing the second special game. Also, the first period is a period until the end of the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game. The first profit information display portion displays profit information obtained by adding the game profit obtained in the first special game to the game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state following the first special game. It shall be. Thus, by looking at the first profit information display portion, it is possible to confirm the profit information indicating the amount of the game profit obtained in one special game and the first game state set thereafter.

Further, as a result, when a plurality of first profit information display portions are provided when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, each first profit information display portion displays the special game of each time and the subsequent first game. Since it is possible to display profit information in combination with states, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp the process through which the profit information shown in the second profit information display section was acquired. becomes.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-5,
It is characterized in that period information indicating the execution period of the first game state is added to the first profit information display portion.

According to such a gaming machine, period information indicating the execution period of the first game state is added to the first profit information display section. As a result, it is possible to grasp how long the execution period of the first game state following the special game was for the profit information displayed in the first profit information display portion. As a result, the profit information displayed in the first profit information display portion, that is, the profit information indicating the game profit obtained in the first game state after one special game and the special game is finished, is processed. It is possible to easily and reliably grasp whether the profit information has been obtained through the above.

For example, when profit information displayed in a predetermined first profit information display portion indicates an amount greater (or less) than profit information displayed in other first profit information display portions, the first profit information display portion By looking at the added period information, it is possible to guess that it is due to the length of the period of the first game state in which the game profit can be obtained by the second special game. In addition, when the special game occurs multiple times in the second period, it is possible to grasp how much game profit can be obtained by continuing the first game state between special games for how long. Become.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily grasp the amount of game profit earned and prevents the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, in the ``special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result'', the specific result is a big win (stopping the big win pattern), and the special game is a big win. It is possible to use the special game execution means as a big hit game execution means. In addition, in the ``second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game capable of obtaining a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specified result'', the second specified result is a small win (small win symbol stop), the second special game can be a small winning game, and the second special game executing means can be a small winning game executing means.

Also, the first game state can be a high-probability-low base state, and the second game state can be a low-probability-low base state (normal state). Then, the second period is started based on the execution of the big win game in the second game state, and thereafter ends when the game state is set to the second game state (low probability low base state) in a period other than the big win game. It may be assumed that Also, a third game state (low-probability-high base state) and a fourth game state (high-probability-high base state) may be provided. Also in this case, even if it becomes the third game state or the fourth game state after the start of the second period, the second period continues, and the game state is the second game state (low probability low base state) during the period other than the big hit game ) is set to terminate. That is, this second period is also referred to as the "Renso period (special period)".

In addition, the second profit information display portion displays the total amount of game profits obtained in the jackpot game and the small win game generated in the second period, and the first profit information display portion displays the jackpot game in the second period. And it is possible to display the game profit obtained in the small winning game until the occurrence of the next big winning game of the relevant big winning game. In addition, from the game profit displayed in the first profit information display part and / or the second profit information display part, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game is not displayed (not added), that is, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game Game profit may be excluded. For example, a jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game, 2R sixth jackpot game, 2R seventh jackpot game, 2R eighth jackpot game of the present embodiment) with a small amount of game profit that can be obtained is displayed in the first profit information display unit and / Or it may be excluded from the display target of the second profit information display section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that such a big win game that is relatively disadvantageous to the player has occurred.

In addition, in a predetermined game situation (for example, high-probability-low base state, small winning game), the first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game area, and the second display device inside the game area is provided with the first profit information display unit. 2 A profit information display section may be provided. In another game situation (during a jackpot game), the first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device outside the game area, and the first profit information display unit and the second profit information display unit are provided on the second display device inside the game area. An information display may be provided. In addition, in still other game situations (during ready-to-win presentation, during character presentation), the first profit information display portion and/or the second profit information display portion that have been displayed on the first display device and/or the second display device until then are displayed. There is a case where the information display section is turned off and neither the first profit information display section nor the second profit information display section is displayed on the first display device and the second display device. This makes it easy for the player to see the ready-to-win effect (specific effect) and the like, and makes it possible for the player to easily understand and notify the determination result. It should be noted that it is also possible to apply a situation different from these as the game situation.

(Reference Invention 17)
In a conventional gaming machine, when a game performance with high reliability of a big hit is executed, the game interest is enhanced, but when the game performance results in a relatively disadvantageous jackpot for the player, the game interest is increased. There was a risk of a decline.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the circumstances described above, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances amusement in a game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
A variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can be entered and a state where a game ball cannot be entered;
a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is in a ball-enterable state;
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when a result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, the predetermined identification information is displayed in a reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stop-displayed in a hit mode, and the identification information is displayed. If the result of the variable display is not a specific result, the predetermined identification information will be in the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information will be stopped in the off mode.
Having a plurality of game effects including a first game effect as the game effects,
Having a plurality of identification information including first identification information as the identification information,
When executing the first game effect with the variable display of the identification information, the first identification information is set to the ready-to-win mode in the variable display of the identification information,
When the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specified result, the first identification information is stop-displayed in the winning mode, and when the result of the variable display of the identification information is not the specified result, the first identification information is displayed. It is characterized in that the reach mode is stopped and displayed in the out-of-range mode.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of pieces of identification information including the first identification information as the identification information, and a plurality of games including the first game piece as the game effects executed along with the variable display of the identification information. have a performance. Then, when the first game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result, the effect constituting the ready-to-win mode is executed with the first identification information, and then the first identification information. shall be stopped and displayed in a winning manner. As a result, when the first game effect is executed and the specified result is obtained, the first identification information is used for the winning mode. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the player's sense of security when the first game effect is executed, and to increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1,
Having a first identification result and a second identification result as the identification result,
The first specified result is more advantageous to the player than the second specified result,
When the first identification information is stop-displayed in the win mode, the result of the variable display of the identification information is the first identification result.

According to such a gaming machine, the specified results include a first specified result that is relatively advantageous to the player and a second specified result that is more disadvantageous than the first specified result. When the first identification information is stop-displayed in a win mode, that is, when the first game effect is executed, the first identification result is relatively advantageous for the player. As a result, the player expects execution of the first game effect, and when the first game effect is executed, it becomes possible to enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-2,
Having a second game effect as the game effect,
Having second identification information as the identification information,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the winning mode, the result of the variable display of the identification information may be the second identification result,
When executing the second game effect along with the variable display of the identification information, when the variable display of the identification information becomes the reach state with the first identification information and the reach state with the second identification information and when and
When the first identification information is in the reach mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the win mode, and the identification information is changed. if the display result is not a specific result, stop displaying the reach state of the first identification information in the out state,
When the second identification information is in the reach mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the win mode, and the identification information is changed. If the result of display is not the specified result, the reach mode of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the missing mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include the first game effect and the second game effect, and the identification information includes the first identification information and the second identification information. Then, when the second game effect is executed and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specified result, the effect constituting the ready-to-win mode is executed with the first identification information, and then the first identification is performed. The information is stop-displayed in a winning mode, and the second identification information is stop-displayed in a winning mode after executing an effect that constitutes a ready-to-win mode with the second identification information. Further, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a win mode, the second identification result is relatively disadvantageous for the player. As a result, when the second game effect is executed, there are times when the specific result is the first specific result and when the specific result is the second specific result even when the specific result is obtained. As a result, the player expects that the first game effect will be executed, and if the second game effect is executed, expects that the first specified result will be obtained, and plays the game. can be increased.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 17-1 to 17-3,
In the case where the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the identification information, in the variable display of the identification information, when the ready-to-win state occurs with the second identification information,
It is characterized in that a change effect is executed to change the second identification information to the first identification information, and the ready-to-reach mode is set with the first identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, when the ready-to-win state occurs with the second identification information during the execution of the first game effect, the change effect is executed to change the second identification information to the first identification information. , to the reach state according to the first identification information. Thus, when the first game performance is executed, even if the ready-to-win state by the second identification information occurs, the change performance increases the interest in the game and also enhances the player's sense of security with respect to the first game performance. becomes possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4,
The change effect is executed at a second display position different from the first display position displaying the second identification information,
It is characterized in that the first identification information is displayed at the first display position in the ready-to-reach mode after the first stage change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the change effect is executed by moving from the first display position where the second identification information is displayed in the ready-to-win mode to the second display position. Then, the first identification information changed from the second identification information to the first identification information by the change effect is moved to the first display position and displayed in the reach mode. As a result, by moving the changing effect from the first display position and executing it, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice the occurrence of the changing effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to become aware of the occurrence of the change performance and to increase the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5,
In the identification information display area for displaying the identification information, the second display position is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position.

According to such a gaming machine, the second display position where the change effect is executed is closer to the central position of the identification information display area than the first display position. This makes it possible to make the changing effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the changing effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to become aware of the occurrence of the change performance and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-5 or Reference Invention 17-6,
The first identification information displayed at the second display position in the change effect is larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before the change.

According to such a game machine, the changed first identification information displayed at the second display position in the change effect is displayed larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before execution of the change effect. This makes it possible to make the changing effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the changing effect. Also, this makes it possible for the player to become aware of the occurrence of the change performance and to increase the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the amusement of the game.

(Reference Invention 18)
In a conventional game machine, based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole, a win/fail decision is made with a predetermined probability of a big win, and symbols are variably displayed, and when the result of the win/fail decision is a big win, the symbols are stopped and displayed as the big win symbols, and the big win is displayed. There is a game that executes a jackpot game to open a prize-winning slot. In addition, a game effect (ready effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the variable display of the pattern, and the possibility that the result of the win/loss determination will be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit pattern and the display is stopped. showed the potential to do so. In addition, by displaying the amount of prize balls obtained by the jackpot game, when a series of games in which a plurality of jackpot games are executed in a short period of time occurs, how much prize balls were obtained during the series of games. There is a game machine that produces an effect indicating As a result, the sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the big win is heightened by the game presentation, and the interest in the game is heightened by grasping the amount of prize balls obtained in the big win game.

In the gaming machine as described above, although the amount of winning balls obtained by the big win game is indicated, it is difficult to grasp whether the amount of winning is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a possibility that the game will be distrusted and the interest in the game will be lowered.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest in the game while indicating the amount of game profit obtained.

The gaming machine of Reference invention 18-1 invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game executing means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained,
The game effects include a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect indicates a higher possibility as the execution possibility of the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
The specific character is displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display portion reaches a specific amount.

According to such a gaming machine, the game machine has a first game effect and a second game effect which are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information and which indicate the possibility of executing the special game. Further, the first game effect is a game effect indicating a higher possibility as the execution possibility of the special game than the second game effect, and is a game effect for displaying a specific character. Further, a profit information display section for displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained is provided, and the specific character is displayed even when the profit information displayed on the profit information display section reaches a specific amount. do. As a result, at the timing when the profit information reaches the specific amount, the specific character used in the first game effect showing the relatively high possibility of executing the special game is displayed, thereby allowing the player to obtain a large game profit. This is notified, and the player can easily recognize that he or she has obtained a large amount of game profit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1,
The profit information display unit is disabled to display the specific amount of profit information based on the game profit obtained in one special game, and the specific amount based on the game profit obtained in the special game a plurality of times. It is characterized by being able to display the profit information of

According to such a gaming machine, the specific amount of profit information is not displayed when only the game profit obtained in one special game is displayed. profit information can be displayed. As a result, the specific amount of profit information is set to an amount exceeding the game profit obtainable in one special game, and when the profit information is displayed in the profit information display portion, the specific character is displayed. It is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game when the game is played.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect and the specific character displayed when the profit information displayed in the profit information display portion reaches a specific amount include characters having the same shape. It is characterized by being

According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect indicating the feasibility of the special game and the specific character indicating that the profit information displayed based on the acquired game profit has reached a specific amount. The character and , are configured to include the same shape. In other words, the specific character displayed in both scenes is not only the same character, but also has the same shape. In addition, this allows the player to easily (intuitively) understand that the specific characters that appear in both scenes are the same specific character, and that situations that are advantageous to the player are occurring in both scenes. ) can be recognized.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 18-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 18-1 to 18-3,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variable display of the identification information,
The specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display portion reaches a specific amount is displayed during execution of the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the variable display of the identification information, and the specific character displayed when the profit information reaches the specific amount is the special game. displayed during the execution of As a result, the specific character can appear both during the variable display of the identification information and during the execution of the special game, and it is possible to increase the appearance time of the specific character. Further, this makes it possible to make the specific character appear even in different game situations, and to maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decline in interest in the game while indicating the amount of game profit obtained.

1 pachinko game machine, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display unit), 8 production pattern, 20 first start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control section), 100 image control board (image control section), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game executing means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result;
a game effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information;
a profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the total amount of game profit obtained when the game state is in a specific state advantageous to the player;
a specific profit display unit that is displayed when the total amount of gaming profit obtained in the specific state reaches a specific amount,
Having a first game effect as the game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display of the identification information,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
When the total amount of game profits obtained during execution of the special game reaches the specified amount, the specified profit display portion is displayed, and the specified character and the specified amount of game profit are displayed on the specified profit display portion. information is displayed and
both the profit information display portion and the specific profit display portion are displayed;
The specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for a specific period while maintaining the display of information indicating the specific character and the specific amount of gaming profit,
The profit information display unit updates the display of the profit information when a game profit is obtained even while the specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for the specific period of time. machine.

Images